<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>Teaching Methods &amp; Techniques &#8211; TEFL AI Tools</title>
	<atom:link href="https://tefl.ai/category/teaching-methods-techniques/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://tefl.ai</link>
	<description></description>
	<lastBuildDate>Mon, 12 Oct 2026 11:34:02 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-GB</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=7.1.3</generator>

<image>
	<url>https://tefl.ai/wp-content/uploads/2026/08/TEFL-AI-logo-2-100x100.jpg</url>
	<title>Teaching Methods &amp; Techniques &#8211; TEFL AI Tools</title>
	<link>https://tefl.ai</link>
	<width>32</width>
	<height>32</height>
</image> 
	<item>
		<title>Past Continuous Tense</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 12 Oct 2026 11:34:02 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English grammar]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ESL Teaching]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[grammar lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3502</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[The past continuous is the English verb form made with was or were plus the -ing form of a verb, used for an action that was in progress at a particular time in the past. It most often supplies the background against which a shorter past simple event happens.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-size: 21px; line-height: 1.6; font-weight: 600; color: #0f2233; margin: 0 0 24px;">The past continuous is the English verb form made with was or were plus the -ing form of a verb, used for an action that was in progress at a particular time in the past. It most often supplies the background against which a shorter past simple event happens.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 24px 26px; margin: 0 0 30px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li>Form: <em>was</em> or <em>were</em> plus verb plus -ing. <em>I was working. They were waiting.</em></li>
<li>It is not a tense in the strict sense. It is the past tense of <em>be</em> carrying continuous aspect, which is why it borrows all its machinery from <em>was</em> and <em>were</em>.</li>
<li>Its main job is background. It describes what was already in progress when a past simple event happened.</li>
<li>It is also called the past progressive. The two names mean the same thing.</li>
<li>The hard part for learners is not the form. It is knowing which of two past actions gets the continuous, and leaving stative verbs out of it.</li>
</ul>
<p style="margin: 16px 0 0; font-size: 15px;"><a style="color: #00e3c4;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Part of the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a></p>
</div>
<h2>An aspect built on a tense</h2>
<p>The past continuous is usually taught as the second past tense a learner meets, and in a classroom that is a sensible fiction. Strictly, it is not a tense at all.</p>
<p>The Cambridge English <em>TKT Glossary</em>, the reference list used across the Teaching Knowledge Test, defines aspect as <q>a way of looking at verb forms without looking specifically at the time of the action or event</q>, and adds that <q>the continuous/progressive aspect may describe an action that is in progress at a particular time</q>. English marks tense in two places, present and past, and the past continuous is the past tense of <em>be</em> with continuous aspect stacked on top. The time comes from <em>was</em> and <em>were</em>. The sense of being in progress comes from -ing.</p>
<p>That matters in practice for one reason. Everything a class already knows about <em>was</em> and <em>were</em>, including the negative, the question and the fact that <em>did</em> never appears, transfers directly to the new form. A teacher who presents it as a fresh tense with fresh rules is making it harder than it is.</p>
<h2>How it is formed</h2>
<p>The British Council states the rule in one line: the past continuous <q>is made from the past tense of the verb be and the -ing form of a verb</q>. Because the auxiliary is <em>be</em>, the negative and the question are simpler than in the past simple. There is no <em>did</em> to introduce and no base form to return to.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Form</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Pattern</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Example</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Affirmative</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">subject + was or were + verb + ing</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">She was reading. They were talking.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Negative</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">subject + was not or were not + verb + ing</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">She was not reading. They were not talking.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Question</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">was or were + subject + verb + ing</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Was she reading? Were they talking?</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Short answer</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">yes or no + subject + was or were</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Yes, she was. No, they were not.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Contracted</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">wasn&#8217;t, weren&#8217;t</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">She wasn&#8217;t reading. Weren&#8217;t they talking?</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">The spelling of the -ing form follows the same three rules as the present continuous: a final silent <em>e</em> is dropped, as in <em>making</em>; a single final consonant after a single stressed vowel is doubled, as in <em>sitting</em> and <em>running</em>; and <em>ie</em> becomes <em>y</em>, as in <em>lying</em>. A class that has done the present continuous has already done this.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 22px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The stative verb limit</p>
<p style="margin: 0; line-height: 1.7;">The British Council is direct about it: <q>We do not normally use the past continuous with stative verbs</q>. Its example is a speaker who got home and <em>needed</em> a shower, not <em>was needing</em> one. Verbs of knowing, wanting, owning, believing and belonging describe states rather than actions, and a state cannot be in progress. The exception learners need is the small group that changes meaning: <em>I was thinking about it</em> is fine because thinking there is an activity, while <em>I was thinking it was Tuesday</em> is not, because there it is an opinion.</p>
</div>
<h2>The five uses, in the British Council wording</h2>
<p>The British Council LearnEnglish grammar reference lists five uses. The first is the one every coursebook teaches and the one most worth the lesson time. The other four are extensions of the same idea, that the action was spread out over a period rather than done at a point.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Use</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Example</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Something which happened before and after another action</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><q>The children were doing their homework when I got home.</q></td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Something that happened before and after a specific time</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><q>It was eight o&#8217;clock. I was writing a letter.</q></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">To show that something continued for some time</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><q>My head was aching.</q> <q>Everyone was shouting.</q></td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Something that happened again and again</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><q>I was practising every day, three times a day.</q> <q>They were always quarrelling.</q></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">With verbs which show change or growth</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><q>The children were growing up quickly.</q> <q>Her English was improving.</q></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">Use categories and examples quoted from the British Council LearnEnglish page <cite>Past continuous</cite>. The fourth use, with <em>always</em>, usually carries a note of irritation, and that is worth teaching because learners who use it neutrally will sound more annoyed than they mean to.</p>
<h2>The interrupted action pattern</h2>
<p>This is the pattern the form is taught for and the pattern most of its real use falls into. Two past actions are set against each other. The longer one, already in progress, takes the past continuous. The shorter one, which happens in the middle of it, takes the <a href="https://tefl.ai/past-simple-tense/">past simple</a>.</p>
<div style="border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; background: #f3fbfa; padding: 14px 18px; margin: 16px 0; line-height: 1.8;">
<p style="margin: 0;">I was walking home when it started to rain.<br />
It started to rain while I was walking home.</p>
</div>
<p>The two sentences describe the same event. What changes is which clause carries <em>when</em> or <em>while</em>, and the choice is not free.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Word</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Goes with</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Pattern</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Example</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>when</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">the past simple, the short event</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">past continuous + when + past simple</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">I was cooking when the phone rang.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>while</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">the past continuous, the long action</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">past simple + while + past continuous</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The phone rang while I was cooking.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>as</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">the past continuous, like <em>while</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">past simple + as + past continuous</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The phone rang as I was cooking.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">The clauses can be swapped round in every row with a comma, so <em>When the phone rang, I was cooking</em> is equally correct. What does not work is <em>while</em> with the short event. <em>While the phone rang</em> makes the ring last as long as the cooking, which is rarely what the speaker means.</p>
<p>Two further points belong in the same lesson. First, two past continuous forms together mean two long actions running in parallel: <em>I was cooking while she was reading</em>, with no interruption at all. Second, two past simple forms together mean one event followed by another: <em>When the phone rang, I answered it</em>. Only the mixed pattern gives the interruption, and that is why the form is taught in contrast with the past simple rather than on its own.</p>
<h2>How it is used in practice</h2>
<ol style="line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>Draw the timeline before you say the rule.</strong> A long wavy line for the continuous action and a short vertical stroke cutting across it for the past simple event. The picture does more than the explanation, and learners can point at it when they are not sure which form a clause needs.</li>
<li><strong>Teach it against the past simple, not after it.</strong> The form has no meaning on its own in the interrupted action pattern. Every presentation sentence should contain both forms, and every controlled practice item should make the learner choose between them.</li>
<li><strong>Ask what the context trains.</strong> A lesson built on <em>what were you doing at nine o&#8217;clock last night</em> trains the continuous for every verb last night, which is the failure case below. A context built on interruptions trains the contrast.</li>
<li><strong>Use a <a href="https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/">concept checking question</a> on duration.</strong> <em>Did the walking take a long time? Did the rain start suddenly? Which started first?</em> Three questions settle most cases faster than a rule does.</li>
<li><strong>Keep stative verbs out of the practice stage.</strong> A gap fill that asks learners to put <em>know</em> or <em>want</em> into the past continuous teaches an error. Choose activity verbs for the practice and deal with the stative limit as a separate, short stage.</li>
</ol>
<h2>A worked classroom example</h2>
<p>An A2 group of ten adults in a morning class, mostly Spanish and Brazilian Portuguese speakers with one Polish and one Vietnamese learner. The target is the past continuous in the interrupted action pattern, and the teacher has sixty minutes.</p>
<p>She opens with a short story about her own weekend. She was cycling to the shops when her chain came off. She was fixing it when a neighbour stopped to help. The class listens twice and on the second listening writes every verb they hear, which gives a board list of <em>was cycling</em>, <em>came off</em>, <em>was fixing</em>, <em>stopped</em>. She asks the class to sort the four into two columns and to say what the difference is, which is <a href="https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/">guided discovery</a> and takes a few minutes.</p>
<div style="border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; background: #f3fbfa; padding: 14px 18px; margin: 16px 0; line-height: 1.8;">
<p style="margin: 0;">Column one: was cycling, was fixing. Long. Already happening.<br />
Column two: came off, stopped. Short. Happened in the middle.</p>
</div>
<p>She draws the timeline, labels the two columns with it, and the class produces the pattern correctly in the controlled stage. Then the freer practice, in which learners tell a partner about something that happened to them last week, produces this from one of the Spanish speakers: <em>I was watching a film when my brother was arriving.</em></p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 22px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">Why that sentence is the useful one</p>
<p style="margin: 0; line-height: 1.7;">The learner has learned the lesson as it was taught. He heard that last week&#8217;s longer actions take <em>was</em> plus -ing, he heard that the story is in the past, and he has put the whole story into the new form because it is the form the lesson was about. The error is not a failure of attention. It is evidence that the presentation trained <em>past story equals continuous</em> rather than <em>long action equals continuous, short action equals simple</em>. Correcting the sentence alone fixes one sentence. Returning to the timeline and asking <em>did the arriving take a long time</em> fixes the rule, and the learner gives the past simple himself.</p>
</div>
<p>The teacher does exactly that, on the board, with the class watching. She draws the long line for <em>watching a film</em>, asks where the arriving goes, and the learner draws a short stroke across it without being told. The next three sentences from the group all carry the contrast. The repair cost two minutes and it was cheaper than a second lesson.</p>
<h2>Common learner errors</h2>
<p>The form is easy. Almost every error is in the choice between the two past forms, and the pattern of errors is predictable from the learner&#8217;s first language, which makes this one of the clearer cases of <a href="https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/">L1 interference</a> in the tense system.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Error</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Example</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Where it comes from</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">What to do</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Both clauses continuous</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>I was watching TV when he was arriving.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">A presentation context that trains <em>past story equals continuous</em>. Not L1 driven; it appears in every first language group.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Return to the timeline and ask which action was short. Let the learner supply the past simple.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Continuous with a stative verb</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>I was knowing him for years.</em> <em>She was wanting a coffee.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Overextension of -ing to states. Qian (2015) found both Chinese and Mongolian learners doing this and read it as L1 transfer, and it is frequent in Slavic groups, where the imperfective covers states as well as actions.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Teach a short list of stative verbs as vocabulary. Practise the past simple of <em>know</em>, <em>want</em> and <em>need</em> directly.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Continuous for a past habit</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>When I was a child I was going to school by bus every day.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Spanish, Portuguese, Italian and French have an imperfect tense that covers habit, state and action in progress in one form. Learners map the whole imperfect onto the continuous.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Give <em>used to</em> and the past simple for habits, and keep the continuous for a single occasion in progress.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Underuse: the simple for an action in progress</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>I read a book when he came in.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">German and Dutch have no grammatical progressive. Roberts and Liszka (2021) found German and Dutch learners of English processing progressive and simple sentences the same way even when they knew the rule.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Make the contrast audible: drill minimal pairs where only the form changes the picture, and insist on the timeline.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Missing auxiliary</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>I going home when I saw her.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The auxiliary carries no meaning the learner can hear, so it is dropped under pressure. Common in Vietnamese, Thai and Mandarin groups and in early learners of every background.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Drill the contracted negative and the question, both of which make <em>was</em> and <em>were</em> impossible to drop.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;"><em>While</em> with the short event</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>While the phone rang, I was cooking.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Learners treat <em>when</em> and <em>while</em> as synonyms, which they nearly are in many first languages.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Teach <em>while</em> as belonging to the continuous clause only, and give <em>when</em> as the safe default.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>What the research says about how it is learned</h2>
<p>The best developed account of how second language learners pick up English tense and aspect is the Aspect Hypothesis, set out at book length by Bardovi-Harlig (2000). Its claim about the progressive is specific: learners first attach -ing to activity verbs, the ones that describe something going on with no built in endpoint, such as <em>walk</em>, <em>play</em> and <em>talk</em>, and only later extend it to verbs with an endpoint and, in error, to states.</p>
<p>Muñoz and Gilabert (2011) tested this with instructed Catalan and Spanish bilingual learners of English and found the association between -ing and durative verbs held across proficiency levels, though not as tightly to activity verbs as the strongest version of the hypothesis predicts. Qian (2015) found the same prototype pattern in Chinese and Mongolian learners and, alongside it, the overextension of -ing to stative verbs noted in the error table above.</p>
<p>Two limits are worth stating. Most of this research describes what learners produce, not what instruction should do about it, and Thane (2018) reviews a body of later work showing that first language, task type and the teaching materials all bend the sequence. For a classroom the practical reading is modest: start the form on activity verbs, because that is where learners will place it anyway, and treat the stative limit as a separate teaching point rather than expecting it to emerge.</p>
<div style="border: 2px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 26px 0; background: #f3fbfa;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #0f2233;">In the classroom</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; line-height: 1.7;">Four decisions that separate a past continuous lesson from a past continuous worksheet.</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>Present it in contrast, never alone.</strong> A sentence with only the past continuous in it teaches the form and nothing about when to choose it.</li>
<li><strong>Put the timeline on the board and leave it there.</strong> It is the reference learners return to when they are unsure, and it works without any metalanguage.</li>
<li><strong>Choose the context for the contrast it trains.</strong> Interruptions, accidents, alibis and what people were doing when the lights went out all force the choice. A single long evening does not.</li>
<li><strong>Deal with stative verbs in their own slot.</strong> Five minutes, a short list, and the past simple of each, before the freer practice rather than as a correction after it.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2>Sources and further reading</h2>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">The two books below are cited bibliographically because they are print titles with no freely readable edition to link to. Every other source on this list was opened and checked on 12 October 2026, the research articles through their ERIC records.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Source</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">What it provides</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/grammar/english-grammar-reference/past-continuous" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council LearnEnglish, <cite>Past continuous</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The formation sentence, the five use categories and examples quoted above, and the stative verb limit.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Cambridge English, <cite>TKT Glossary</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The definition of aspect and the description of the continuous aspect used in the opening section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=ED445541" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Bardovi-Harlig, K. (2000), <cite>Tense and Aspect in Second Language Acquisition: Form, Meaning, and Use</cite>, Blackwell, Language Learning Monograph Series</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The book length statement of the Aspect Hypothesis, including the chapter on it and the chapter on the influence of instruction.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ950979" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Muñoz, C. and Gilabert, R. (2011), More evidence concerning the Aspect Hypothesis: the acquisition of English progressive aspect by Catalan-Spanish instructed learners, <cite>IRAL</cite> 49(3), 241 to 263</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The finding that -ing is associated with durative verbs across proficiency levels in instructed learners.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1075437" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Qian, C. (2015), A cross-sectional study on the roles of lexical aspect and L1 transfer in tense-aspect acquisition, <cite>English Language Teaching</cite> 8(7), 114 to 132</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The overextension of progressive marking to stative verbs by Chinese and Mongolian learners, read as L1 transfer.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1313153" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Roberts, L. and Liszka, S. A. (2021), Grammatical aspect and L2 learners&#8217; online processing of temporarily ambiguous sentences in English, <cite>Second Language Research</cite> 37(4), 619 to 647</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The finding that German and Dutch learners process progressive and simple sentences alike, used in the error table.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1257441" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Thane, P. D. (2018), The present state of the Aspect Hypothesis: a critical perspective, <cite>Eurasian Journal of Applied Linguistics</cite> 4(2), 261 to 273</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The review of later work showing that first language, task and materials bend the predicted sequence.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Swan, M. (2016), <cite>Practical English Usage</cite>, fourth edition, Oxford University Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The standard teacher reference on the past continuous, the stative verb limit and the <em>when</em> and <em>while</em> patterns.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Thornbury, S. (1999), <cite>How to Teach Grammar</cite>, Longman</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The treatment of presenting a form in contrast and of timelines as a presentation tool.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>What is the past continuous tense?</h3>
<p>It is the English verb form made with <em>was</em> or <em>were</em> plus the -ing form of a verb, as in <em>I was working</em> and <em>they were waiting</em>. It describes an action that was in progress at a particular time in the past, and it most often sets the scene for a shorter event told in the past simple.</p>
<h3>Is the past continuous the same as the past progressive?</h3>
<p>Yes. The two names describe one form. British coursebooks and the Cambridge teaching awards tend to say continuous, while North American materials and much of the research literature say progressive. Learners will meet both labels and should be told they mean the same thing.</p>
<h3>How do you form the past continuous?</h3>
<p>Use <em>was</em> with <em>I</em>, <em>he</em>, <em>she</em> and <em>it</em>, and <em>were</em> with <em>you</em>, <em>we</em> and <em>they</em>, followed by the verb plus -ing. The negative puts <em>not</em> after <em>was</em> or <em>were</em>, and the question moves <em>was</em> or <em>were</em> in front of the subject. No <em>did</em> is involved at any point, which is the main formal difference from the past simple.</p>
<h3>What is the difference between the past continuous and the past simple?</h3>
<p>The past simple reports a completed event and moves a story forward. The past continuous describes an action that was already in progress and gives the background. In <em>I was cooking when the phone rang</em>, the cooking was under way, the ring interrupted it, and the two forms together tell the listener which was the longer action.</p>
<h3>Which verbs are not used in the past continuous?</h3>
<p>Stative verbs, which describe states rather than actions, are not normally used in any continuous form. These include <em>know</em>, <em>believe</em>, <em>want</em>, <em>need</em>, <em>own</em> and <em>belong</em>. The British Council gives the example that on getting home a speaker <em>needed</em> a shower rather than <em>was needing</em> one. A few verbs, such as <em>think</em> and <em>have</em>, are stative in one meaning and dynamic in another.</p>
<h3>When is the past continuous taught?</h3>
<p>Most coursebooks introduce it at A2, usually a few units after the past simple and almost always in the interrupted action pattern with <em>when</em> and <em>while</em>. It is then recycled at B1 for narrative writing. The practical trigger is that learners can already form the past simple and know <em>was</em> and <em>were</em>, because the new form depends on both.</p>
<h2>Related terms in this glossary</h2>
<ul style="line-height: 1.8;">
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/past-simple-tense/">Past simple tense</a>, the form the past continuous is taught against and the other half of the interrupted action pattern.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/">Present perfect tense</a>, the other aspect built on a tense, and the comparison that follows this one in most syllabuses.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/">Guided discovery</a>, the route used in the worked example to get the long and short split out of the class.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/">Concept checking questions</a>, the three duration questions that settle most choices between the two forms.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/">L1 interference</a>, which explains why Romance, Slavic and Germanic first language groups make different errors with the same form.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">The full TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</li>
</ul>
<p>For the qualification and career terminology that sits behind classroom practice, see <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL qualifications and terminology explained</a> on The TEFL Institute. For how a grammar stage is timed and written into a plan, see <a href="https://tefl.ie/how-to-write-a-lesson-plan/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">how to write a lesson plan</a> on The TEFL Institute of Ireland.</p>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 8px; padding: 18px 20px; margin: 26px 0; background: #fbfdfd; font-size: 15px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0;">tefl.ai (2026) <cite>Past continuous tense</cite>. TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary. Available at: https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/ (Accessed: 12 October 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">Last updated 12 October 2026. Written by Katie Troy for tefl.ai. All external sources were opened and checked on that date.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">{"@context": "https://schema.org", "@graph": [{"@type": "DefinedTerm", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/#definedterm", "name": "Past Continuous Tense", "alternateName": ["past continuous", "past progressive", "past progressive tense", "was/were + ing"], "description": "The past continuous is the English verb form made with was or were plus the -ing form of a verb, used for an action that was in progress at a particular time in the past. It most often supplies the background against which a shorter past simple event happens.", "url": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/", "inDefinedTermSet": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}}, {"@type": "Article", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/#article", "headline": "Past Continuous Tense: Definition, Form, Uses and Classroom Teaching", "description": "The past continuous is the English verb form made with was or were plus the -ing form of a verb, used for an action that was in progress at a particular time in the past. It most often supplies the background against which a shorter past simple event happens.", "mainEntityOfPage": {"@type": "WebPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/"}, "about": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/#definedterm"}, "isPartOf": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}, "inLanguage": "en-GB", "datePublished": "2026-10-12", "dateModified": "2026-10-12", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Katie Troy"}, "publisher": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"}, "citation": [{"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Past continuous", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "British Council"}, "url": "https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/grammar/english-grammar-reference/past-continuous"}, {"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "TKT Glossary", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Cambridge English"}, "url": "https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf"}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "Tense and Aspect in Second Language Acquisition: Form, Meaning, and Use", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Kathleen Bardovi-Harlig"}, "datePublished": "2000", "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=ED445541"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "More Evidence Concerning the Aspect Hypothesis: The Acquisition of English Progressive Aspect by Catalan-Spanish Instructed Learners", "author": [{"@type": "Person", "name": "Carmen Muñoz"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "Roger Gilabert"}], "datePublished": "2011", "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ950979"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "A Cross-Sectional Study on the Roles of Lexical Aspect and L1 Transfer in Tense-Aspect Acquisition", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Cuijing Qian"}, "datePublished": "2015", "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1075437"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "Grammatical Aspect and L2 Learners' Online Processing of Temporarily Ambiguous Sentences in English", "author": [{"@type": "Person", "name": "Leah Roberts"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "Sarah Ann Liszka"}], "datePublished": "2021", "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1313153"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "The Present State of the Aspect Hypothesis: A Critical Perspective", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Patrick D. Thane"}, "datePublished": "2018", "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1257441"}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "Practical English Usage", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Michael Swan"}, "datePublished": "2016"}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "How to Teach Grammar", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Scott Thornbury"}, "datePublished": "1999"}]}, {"@type": "FAQPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/#faq", "mainEntity": [{"@type": "Question", "name": "What is the past continuous tense?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "It is the English verb form made with was or were plus the -ing form of a verb, as in I was working and they were waiting. It describes an action that was in progress at a particular time in the past, and it most often sets the scene for a shorter event told in the past simple."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Is the past continuous the same as the past progressive?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Yes. The two names describe one form. British coursebooks and the Cambridge teaching awards tend to say continuous, while North American materials and much of the research literature say progressive. Learners will meet both labels and should be told they mean the same thing."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "How do you form the past continuous?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Use was with I, he, she and it, and were with you, we and they, followed by the verb plus -ing. The negative puts not after was or were, and the question moves was or were in front of the subject. No did is involved at any point, which is the main formal difference from the past simple."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "What is the difference between the past continuous and the past simple?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "The past simple reports a completed event and moves a story forward. The past continuous describes an action that was already in progress and gives the background. In I was cooking when the phone rang, the cooking was under way, the ring interrupted it, and the two forms together tell the listener which was the longer action."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Which verbs are not used in the past continuous?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Stative verbs, which describe states rather than actions, are not normally used in any continuous form. These include know, believe, want, need, own and belong. The British Council gives the example that on getting home a speaker needed a shower rather than was needing one. A few verbs, such as think and have, are stative in one meaning and dynamic in another."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "When is the past continuous taught?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Most coursebooks introduce it at A2, usually a few units after the past simple and almost always in the interrupted action pattern with when and while. It is then recycled at B1 for narrative writing. The practical trigger is that learners can already form the past simple and know was and were, because the new form depends on both."}}]}, {"@type": "BreadcrumbList", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/#glossary-breadcrumb", "itemListElement": [{"@type": "ListItem", "position": 1, "name": "tefl.ai", "item": "https://tefl.ai/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 2, "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary", "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 3, "name": "Past Continuous Tense", "item": "https://tefl.ai/past-continuous-tense/"}]}]}</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Recasting</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/recasting/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sun, 11 Oct 2026 18:42:32 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[corrective feedback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Error Correction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3498</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[A recast is a corrective move in which the teacher repeats a learner's incorrect utterance in corrected form, without stopping the conversation or stating that an error was made. The meaning is kept, the form is quietly fixed, and the correction is implicit. It is the most frequently used correction technique in language classrooms.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-size: 21px; line-height: 1.6; font-weight: 600; color: #0f2233; margin: 0 0 24px;">A recast is a corrective move in which the teacher repeats a learner&#8217;s incorrect utterance in corrected form, without stopping the conversation or stating that an error was made. The meaning is kept, the form is quietly fixed, and the correction is implicit. It is the most frequently used correction technique in language classrooms.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 24px 26px; margin: 0 0 30px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li>The teacher supplies the correct form. The learner is not asked to produce it.</li>
<li>It is the most common correction move in observed classrooms and the one least likely to produce a visible repair.</li>
<li>Its weakness is ambiguity. A recast looks exactly like ordinary agreement, so learners often do not notice they were corrected.</li>
<li>It is not a failed technique. It is a technique that works slowly and invisibly, and it is often used where a prompt would work faster.</li>
</ul>
<p style="margin: 16px 0 0; font-size: 15px;"><a style="color: #00e3c4;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Part of the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a></p>
</div>
<h2>Where the term comes from</h2>
<p>The word entered language teaching through second language acquisition research rather than through teacher training. Michael Long&#8217;s work on the linguistic environment in the 1990s treated the recast as a form of negative evidence delivered inside meaningful talk, borrowing the idea from studies of how adults respond to small children, who are rarely told they are wrong and are frequently echoed back in corrected form.</p>
<p>The term became standard in classrooms through Roy Lyster and Leila Ranta&#8217;s 1997 study <cite>Corrective Feedback and Learner Uptake: Negotiation of Form in Communicative Classrooms</cite>, published in <em>Studies in Second Language Acquisition</em> 19(1), pages 37 to 66. They recorded 18.3 hours of interaction across 27 lessons in four primary French immersion classrooms in Montreal, and sorted every correction a teacher made into six categories. Those six categories are still the standard vocabulary for talking about correction, and the recast is the first of them.</p>
<p>Their headline finding was not that recasts are common. It was the combination: teachers showed <q>an overwhelming tendency to use recasts in spite of the latter&#8217;s ineffectiveness at eliciting student-generated repair</q>.</p>
<h2>The numbers that made the term famous</h2>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">All figures below are from Lyster and Ranta (1997) and describe their four immersion classrooms. They are the most quoted numbers in the correction literature and they are not a universal constant.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Feedback type</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Share of all feedback moves</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Leads to learner-generated repair</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Recast</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>55%</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">None, by definition. The correct form has already been supplied, so there is nothing left for the learner to generate.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Elicitation</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">14%</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">45%</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Clarification request</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">11%</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">27%</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Metalinguistic feedback</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">8%</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>46%</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Explicit correction</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">7%</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">None, by definition.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Repetition of error</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">5%</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">31%</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Uptake, meaning any learner response at all following the feedback, ran at 31% after a recast, 50% after explicit correction and 100% after elicitation. <strong>More than half of all correction in those classrooms was delivered by the move that drew the least response.</strong></p>
<h2>How it is used in practice</h2>
<p>A recast takes one turn and costs nothing in lesson time, which is a large part of why it dominates. It has three common shapes.</p>
<ol style="line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>The full recast.</strong> The teacher repeats the whole utterance with the error fixed. Natural, invisible, and the easiest to miss.</li>
<li><strong>The partial recast.</strong> The teacher repeats only the corrected fragment, which isolates the error and makes it far more noticeable. This is the version worth practising.</li>
<li><strong>The stressed recast.</strong> The corrected element carries extra stress or a rising tone, which pushes an implicit move towards the explicit end without ever naming the mistake.</li>
</ol>
<p>Translation counts as a recast too. When a learner reaches for their first language and the teacher supplies the English, the move is doing the same job: the meaning is accepted and the form is supplied.</p>
<p>Recasts are the default during fluency work, where stopping a speaker to analyse a verb ending costs more than the error does. They are a weaker choice during accuracy work, where the whole point of the stage is that the learner produces the form.</p>
<h2>A worked classroom example</h2>
<p>A B1 evening class of nine adults in Cork, thirty minutes into a speaking lesson about holidays. The teacher is not correcting much, deliberately, because the aim of the stage is fluency.</p>
<p>A learner says: <em>I go to Spain last summer with my brother.</em></p>
<p>The teacher says: <em>Ah, you went to Spain last summer.</em></p>
<p>The learner says: <em>Yes, very hot.</em> The conversation continues.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 22px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">What the learner actually heard</p>
<p style="margin: 0; line-height: 1.7;">Interest. Not correction. The teacher&#8217;s turn was a perfectly ordinary thing for a listener to say: repeat back what you were told to show you are following. Nothing in it signalled that anything had gone wrong, and the learner had no reason to inspect it for a difference. The past simple was corrected, and the learner left the room still saying <em>I go</em>.</p>
</div>
<p>This is the characteristic failure of the technique, and it is not a failure of attention on the learner&#8217;s part. It is a design problem. Lyster&#8217;s 1998 follow-up study classified 377 recasts from the same corpus and compared them with the teachers&#8217; non-corrective repetitions, where nothing was wrong and the teacher simply echoed a learner. The two moves turned out to serve identical functions in roughly equal proportions, and teachers delivered positive feedback such as <em>good</em> and <em>yes</em> alongside both of them at similar rates. <strong>From where the learner is sitting, a correction and an agreement can be acoustically and pragmatically the same event.</strong></p>
<p>Two cheap repairs are available, and neither requires abandoning the technique.</p>
<p><strong>Make the recast partial.</strong> Instead of returning the whole sentence, return the fragment: <em>You went.</em> Three syllables, the error isolated, and the flow of the conversation barely disturbed. The learner has something to compare against because only one thing came back.</p>
<p><strong>Or switch to a prompt.</strong> <em>You go, or you went.</em> That is elicitation, it costs one extra turn, and it is the move the research says is most likely to get the learner to say the right form themselves.</p>
<h2>Commonly confused with</h2>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Recast</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Often confused with</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">The distinction</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Recast</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Explicit correction</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Explicit correction states that the utterance was wrong and then supplies the form: <em>Not go, we say went.</em> A recast supplies the form and says nothing about the error. Both are input-providing, and neither leaves the learner anything to work out.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Recast</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Prompts, meaning elicitation, metalinguistic feedback, clarification requests and repetition of error</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">This is the distinction that matters most. Prompts withhold the correct form and push the learner to produce it. Recasts hand it over. The whole argument about correction is really an argument about which of the two a given moment calls for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Recast</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Non-corrective repetition, or echoing</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Echoing repeats a correct utterance to confirm or to let the rest of the class hear it. A recast repeats an incorrect one with the form changed. They sound the same from the back of the room, which is precisely the problem the research identifies.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Recast</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Repetition of error</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Repetition of error gives the mistake back unchanged, usually with a rising tone: <em>You go?</em> Nothing is supplied and the learner has to act. It is a prompt. A recast is its opposite.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Recast</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Reformulation</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">In most writing, reformulation is the written cousin: a learner&#8217;s text rewritten by a proficient user so the two versions can be compared. It is read and studied rather than heard in passing, so it does not carry the ambiguity problem.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Recast</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://tefl.ai/eliciting/">Eliciting</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Eliciting draws language out of learners before anything has gone wrong, as a way of presenting or revising. Recasting responds to something that has already been produced incorrectly. The timing is the difference.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>What the evidence actually supports</h2>
<p>The recast is the one correction technique that is routinely described as both the most common and the least effective, and that summary is too simple in a way worth understanding.</p>
<p>Lyster and Ranta measured <em>uptake</em> and <em>repair</em>: what the learner did in the turn immediately after the feedback. On that measure the recast performs badly, and necessarily so, because a move that supplies the answer cannot also produce an answer. What it does not measure is acquisition. A learner who says nothing in the next turn may still have registered the difference.</p>
<p>Later meta-analytic work, including Lyster and Saito&#8217;s synthesis of oral feedback in classroom settings, found that corrective feedback as a whole does help, and that prompts tended to outproduce recasts in classroom studies while recasts held up better in laboratory conditions. Dan Brown&#8217;s meta-analysis of observational studies confirmed the frequency pattern across many more classrooms than the original four: reformulating moves, recasts chief among them, still account for roughly two thirds of what teachers do.</p>
<p>Three honest limits follow, and they are usually left off pages about this term.</p>
<ul style="line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>The famous numbers come from four classrooms of children in French immersion.</strong> Not adults, not English, not a language school. The six categories travel well. The percentages should be treated as a finding about those rooms rather than a law.</li>
<li><strong>Low uptake is not proof of low learning.</strong> It is proof of low visible response, which is what was counted. This page does not claim recasts fail to teach anything, because the study design cannot show that.</li>
<li><strong>Noticing is the live question.</strong> The evidence that recasts work is strongest where learners could tell a correction was happening. That is an argument for making recasts more salient, not for abandoning them.</li>
</ul>
<p>The defensible claim is a narrow one. A recast is the right move when the priority is keeping a learner talking, and it becomes a wasted move when it is used so often, and so gently, that nobody in the room can tell it apart from agreement.</p>
<div style="border: 2px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 26px 0; background: #f3fbfa;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #0f2233;">In the classroom</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; line-height: 1.7;">Three habits separate a recast that teaches from one that only sounds kind.</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>Shorten it.</strong> Give back the corrected fragment, not the whole sentence. One changed thing is noticeable; six unchanged words around it are camouflage.</li>
<li><strong>Count your own.</strong> Record ten minutes of your own speaking lesson and tally the correction moves. Most teachers are startled by how close to 55% their own recast share sits, because the move is almost reflexive.</li>
<li><strong>Keep one error for later.</strong> Note a recurring mistake during fluency work and bring it to the board in delayed feedback, unattributed. A recast in the moment plus a prompt at the end covers both jobs without interrupting anyone.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2>Sources and further reading</h2>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">The ERIC record below was opened and checked on 9 October 2026. The remaining items are journal and print titles with no freely readable edition to link to, so they are cited bibliographically rather than linked.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Source</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">What it provides</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ539354" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lyster, R. and Ranta, L. (1997), <cite>Corrective Feedback and Learner Uptake: Negotiation of Form in Communicative Classrooms</cite>, Studies in Second Language Acquisition 19(1), 37 to 66</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The six-category taxonomy, the corpus of 18.3 hours across 27 lessons, and every percentage in the table above.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Lyster, R. (1998), <cite>Recasts, repetition, and ambiguity in L2 classroom discourse</cite>, Studies in Second Language Acquisition 20</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The analysis of 377 recasts against non-corrective repetition, and the finding that the two serve identical functions in equal proportions.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Lyster, R. and Saito, K. (2010), <cite>Oral feedback in classroom SLA: a meta-analysis</cite>, Studies in Second Language Acquisition 32</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The synthesis showing corrective feedback helps overall, and the prompt and recast comparison across classroom and laboratory settings.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Brown, D., <cite>The type and linguistic foci of oral corrective feedback in the L2 classroom: a meta-analysis</cite>, Language Teaching Research</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Confirmation of the frequency pattern across far more classrooms than the original four, with reformulating moves at roughly two thirds of teacher feedback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Long, M. H. (1996), <cite>The role of the linguistic environment in second language acquisition</cite>, in Ritchie, W. and Bhatia, T. (eds), Handbook of Second Language Acquisition, Academic Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The account of recasts as negative evidence delivered inside meaningful interaction, which is where the classroom term came from.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Ur, P. (2012), <cite>A Course in Language Teaching</cite>, second edition, Cambridge University Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The standard teacher-training treatment, which lists the recast alongside elicitation, clarification requests, metalinguistic feedback and explicit correction as the practical options for oral feedback.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>Is a recast the same as correcting a student?</h3>
<p>It is one way of correcting, and the quietest one. A recast supplies the right form inside an ordinary-sounding reply and never says that anything was wrong. That is what separates it from explicit correction, which names the error first, and from prompts, which point at the error and leave the learner to fix it.</p>
<h3>Do recasts actually work?</h3>
<p>They work less visibly than the alternatives rather than not at all. The classic study measured what learners did in the very next turn, and on that measure recasts came last, because a move that hands over the answer cannot also produce one. Later meta-analyses found that corrective feedback does aid acquisition and that recasts perform better when learners can tell a correction is taking place.</p>
<h3>When should I use a recast rather than a prompt?</h3>
<p>Use a recast when the stage is about fluency and stopping the speaker would cost more than the error does, when the learner is fragile or new to the group, or when the item is beyond their current level and they could not produce it if asked. Use a prompt when the form is one the learner already knows and has simply slipped on, which is most of the time during accuracy work.</p>
<h3>What is the difference between an implicit and an explicit recast?</h3>
<p>It is a matter of degree rather than a hard line. A full recast delivered in a normal tone is at the implicit end and is easy to miss. Shortening it to the corrected fragment, adding stress to the changed element, or using a questioning tone pushes it towards the explicit end while still never stating that an error occurred.</p>
<h3>Can recasts be used in written work?</h3>
<p>The written equivalent is usually called reformulation: the learner&#8217;s text rewritten in correct English so the two can be compared side by side. It is more effective than a spoken recast for the simple reason that a written version sits still, and the learner can look from one to the other for as long as they need.</p>
<h3>Why do teachers use recasts so much if they produce less repair?</h3>
<p>Because they cost nothing. A recast takes one turn, breaks no one&#8217;s concentration, embarrasses nobody and lets the conversation carry on. Every other correction move costs time or face or both. The honest answer is that the recast is popular for the teacher&#8217;s reasons as much as the learner&#8217;s, which is why counting your own is a useful exercise.</p>
<h2>Related terms in this glossary</h2>
<ul style="line-height: 1.8;">
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/interlanguage/">Interlanguage</a>, the developing learner grammar that errors are evidence of, and the reason a recast is answering a system rather than a slip.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/">L1 interference</a>, the source of the errors most often recast, and the pattern that tells you whether one correction will be enough.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/eliciting/">Eliciting</a>, the move that draws language out of learners, and the family that prompts belong to.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">The full TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</li>
</ul>
<p>For the wider question of which errors to correct and when to leave them, see <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/blog/error-correction-esl/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">error correction in ESL</a> on The TEFL Institute, and for what the qualification and career terminology behind classroom practice means, see <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL qualifications and terminology explained</a>. For how much correction practice a training course actually includes in Ireland and what employers look for, see <a href="https://tefl.ie/120-hour-vs-level-5-tefl-employer-requirements/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">120 hour versus Level 5 TEFL</a> on The TEFL Institute of Ireland.</p>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 8px; padding: 18px 20px; margin: 26px 0; background: #fbfdfd; font-size: 15px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0;">tefl.ai (2026) <cite>Recasting</cite>. TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary. Available at: https://tefl.ai/recasting/ (Accessed: 9 October 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">Last updated 9 October 2026. Written by Katie Troy for tefl.ai. All linked external sources were opened and checked on that date.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">{"@context": "https://schema.org", "@graph": [{"@type": "DefinedTerm", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/#definedterm", "name": "Recasting", "alternateName": ["recast", "recasts", "corrective recast", "implicit corrective feedback"], "description": "A recast is a corrective move in which the teacher repeats a learner's incorrect utterance in corrected form, without stopping the conversation or stating that an error was made. The meaning is kept, the form is quietly fixed, and the correction is implicit. It is the most frequently used correction technique in language classrooms.", "url": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/", "inDefinedTermSet": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}}, {"@type": "Article", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/#article", "headline": "Recasting: Definition, Classroom Example and Evidence", "description": "A recast is a corrective move in which the teacher repeats a learner's incorrect utterance in corrected form, without stopping the conversation or stating that an error was made. The meaning is kept, the form is quietly fixed, and the correction is implicit.", "mainEntityOfPage": {"@type": "WebPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/"}, "about": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/#definedterm"}, "isPartOf": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}, "inLanguage": "en-GB", "datePublished": "2026-10-09", "dateModified": "2026-10-09", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Katie Troy"}, "publisher": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"}, "citation": [{"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "Corrective Feedback and Learner Uptake: Negotiation of Form in Communicative Classrooms", "author": [{"@type": "Person", "name": "Roy Lyster"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "Leila Ranta"}], "datePublished": "1997", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "Studies in Second Language Acquisition"}, "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ539354"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "Recasts, repetition, and ambiguity in L2 classroom discourse", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Roy Lyster"}, "datePublished": "1998", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "Studies in Second Language Acquisition"}}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "Oral feedback in classroom SLA: a meta-analysis", "author": [{"@type": "Person", "name": "Roy Lyster"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "Kazuya Saito"}], "datePublished": "2010", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "Studies in Second Language Acquisition"}}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "The type and linguistic foci of oral corrective feedback in the L2 classroom: a meta-analysis", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Dan Brown"}, "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "Language Teaching Research"}}, {"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "The role of the linguistic environment in second language acquisition", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Michael H. Long"}, "datePublished": "1996"}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "A Course in Language Teaching", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Penny Ur"}, "datePublished": "2012", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Cambridge University Press"}}]}, {"@type": "FAQPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/#faq", "mainEntity": [{"@type": "Question", "name": "Is a recast the same as correcting a student?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "It is one way of correcting, and the quietest one. A recast supplies the right form inside an ordinary-sounding reply and never says that anything was wrong. That is what separates it from explicit correction, which names the error first, and from prompts, which point at the error and leave the learner to fix it."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Do recasts actually work?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "They work less visibly than the alternatives rather than not at all. The classic study measured what learners did in the very next turn, and on that measure recasts came last, because a move that hands over the answer cannot also produce one. Later meta-analyses found that corrective feedback does aid acquisition and that recasts perform better when learners can tell a correction is taking place."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "When should I use a recast rather than a prompt?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Use a recast when the stage is about fluency and stopping the speaker would cost more than the error does, when the learner is fragile or new to the group, or when the item is beyond their current level and they could not produce it if asked. Use a prompt when the form is one the learner already knows and has simply slipped on, which is most of the time during accuracy work."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "What is the difference between an implicit and an explicit recast?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "It is a matter of degree rather than a hard line. A full recast delivered in a normal tone is at the implicit end and is easy to miss. Shortening it to the corrected fragment, adding stress to the changed element, or using a questioning tone pushes it towards the explicit end while still never stating that an error occurred."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Can recasts be used in written work?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "The written equivalent is usually called reformulation: the learner's text rewritten in correct English so the two can be compared side by side. It is more effective than a spoken recast for the simple reason that a written version sits still, and the learner can look from one to the other for as long as they need."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Why do teachers use recasts so much if they produce less repair?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Because they cost nothing. A recast takes one turn, breaks no one's concentration, embarrasses nobody and lets the conversation carry on. Every other correction move costs time or face or both. The honest answer is that the recast is popular for the teacher's reasons as much as the learner's, which is why counting your own is a useful exercise."}}]}, {"@type": "BreadcrumbList", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/#glossary-breadcrumb", "itemListElement": [{"@type": "ListItem", "position": 1, "name": "tefl.ai", "item": "https://tefl.ai/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 2, "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary", "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 3, "name": "Recasting", "item": "https://tefl.ai/recasting/"}]}]}</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Present Perfect Tense</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 05 Oct 2026 17:52:47 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Uncategorised]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CEFR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English grammar]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[grammar lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3190</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[The present perfect is the English verb form made with have or has plus a past participle, used to link a past action to the present moment. It covers experience up to now, a situation that began in the past and still continues, and a past event whose result matters now. It never takes a finished time reference.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-size: 21px; line-height: 1.6; font-weight: 600; color: #0f2233; margin: 0 0 24px;">The present perfect is the English verb form made with have or has plus a past participle, used to link a past action to the present moment. It covers experience up to now, a situation that began in the past and still continues, and a past event whose result matters now. It never takes a finished time reference.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 24px 26px; margin: 0 0 30px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li>Form: have or has plus the past participle. <em>I have seen it. She has gone.</em></li>
<li>It is a present form. It says something about now, using an event from before now.</li>
<li>The reliable classroom rule is about the time reference, not about how long ago something happened.</li>
<li>It is strictly an aspect rather than a tense, which is why grammar references and coursebooks label it differently.</li>
<li>Most learner errors with it are the past simple arriving where the present perfect belongs, or the reverse.</li>
</ul>
<p style="margin: 16px 0 0; font-size: 15px;"><a style="color: #00e3c4;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Part of the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a></p>
</div>
<h2>Tense, or aspect</h2>
<p>Almost every coursebook, syllabus and job advertisement calls it the present perfect tense, and almost every grammar reference says that is not quite what it is.</p>
<p>The Cambridge English <em>TKT Glossary</em>, the reference list used across the Teaching Knowledge Test, draws the line clearly. <q>Aspect is a way of looking at verb forms without looking specifically at the time of the action or event</q>, it says, and <q>there are two aspects in English, the continuous/progressive aspect and the perfect aspect</q>. English has two tenses, present and past. Perfect is something layered on top of one of them.</p>
<p>So the present perfect is the present tense carrying perfect aspect. The verb that is actually marked for tense is <em>have</em>, and it is marked present: <em>I have</em>, <em>she has</em>. The past participle is not a tense at all.</p>
<p>This matters in a classroom for one practical reason. A learner who has been told the form is a past tense will reach for it whenever they talk about the past, which is the single most common source of error with it. A learner who has grasped that it is a present form, built out of something earlier, has the rule.</p>
<h2>How it is formed</h2>
<p>The British Council states the formation in one sentence: <q>The present perfect is formed from the present tense of the verb have and the past participle of a verb.</q></p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Form</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Pattern</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Example</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Affirmative</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">subject + have or has + past participle</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">They have finished the report.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Negative</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">subject + have or has + not + past participle</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">He has not replied.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Question</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">have or has + subject + past participle</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Have you eaten?</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Continuous</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">have or has + been + verb with ing</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">She has been waiting since nine.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">The contracted forms are what learners will actually hear. <em>I&#8217;ve</em>, <em>you&#8217;ve</em>, <em>he&#8217;s</em>, <em>we&#8217;ve</em>, <em>they&#8217;ve</em>, and in negatives <em>haven&#8217;t</em> and <em>hasn&#8217;t</em>. In connected speech the contraction is often barely audible, which is a listening problem before it is a grammar problem.</p>
<h2>The three uses, in the British Council wording</h2>
<p>The British Council LearnEnglish grammar reference groups the uses into three, and the grouping is a sound basis for a lesson because each one maps onto a different set of time expressions.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Use</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Typical time expressions</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Example</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;"><q>Something that started in the past and continues in the present</q></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">for, since, all day, all my life</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">We have lived here since 2019.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;"><q>Talking about experience up to the present</q></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">ever, never, before, twice, several times</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Have you ever worked nights?</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;"><q>Something that happened in the past but is important in the present</q></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">just, already, yet, recently</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">I have lost my keys.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">Use categories quoted from the British Council LearnEnglish page <cite>Present perfect</cite>. The same page also covers <em>have been</em> against <em>have gone</em>, and the present perfect continuous.</p>
<h2>How it is used in practice</h2>
<p>A present perfect lesson differs from most grammar lessons in one respect. The form is easy and the meaning is not, so the time spent on each should be the reverse of what most lesson plans allow.</p>
<ol style="line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>Teach one use at a time.</strong> The three uses above look related to a teacher and unrelated to a learner. A lesson that presents all three at once produces a class that can conjugate the form and cannot choose it.</li>
<li><strong>Put the time expression at the centre.</strong> <em>Since</em>, <em>for</em>, <em>ever</em>, <em>just</em> and <em>yet</em> do more work in deciding the form than any abstract rule does. Learners can be taught to spot them long before they can explain them.</li>
<li><strong>Drill the contraction, not the full form.</strong> Learners who only ever practise <em>I have seen</em> will not hear <em>I&#8217;ve seen</em> in the wild. A short <a href="https://tefl.ai/drilling/">drilling</a> stage on the contracted forms pays for itself in the listening lesson three weeks later.</li>
<li><strong>Check meaning before you check form.</strong> A class can produce a flawless present perfect sentence while believing it means a distant past, so a round of <a href="https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/">concept checking questions</a> belongs before the controlled practice, not after it.</li>
</ol>
<h2>A worked classroom example</h2>
<p>A B1 group of nine adults in a morning class, most of them Spanish and Portuguese speakers, one Polish. The target is the third use, a past event with a present result, and the teacher has an hour.</p>
<p>She starts with a picture of a kitchen with a broken window and asks what happened. The class answers in the past simple, correctly and fluently: <em>someone broke the window</em>. She then asks a second question, which is what the room looks like now, and writes the class answer on the board next to the first one.</p>
<div style="border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; background: #f3fbfa; padding: 14px 18px; margin: 16px 0; line-height: 1.8;">
<p style="margin: 0;">Someone broke the window. (What happened)<br />
Someone has broken the window. (Why there is glass on the floor now)</p>
</div>
<p>The pair is the whole lesson. Both sentences are true, both describe the same event, and the difference between them is not in the event at all. It is in which question the speaker is answering.</p>
<p>The class takes it quickly, and then the controlled practice produces a sentence she was not expecting: <em>I have broken my arm when I was fifteen.</em></p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 22px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">Why that sentence is the useful one</p>
<p style="margin: 0; line-height: 1.7;">The learner has the meaning right. The arm did break, and he is telling her about it because it still matters to him. What he has not got is the rule that overrides meaning: a finished time reference blocks the present perfect, whatever the speaker feels about the result. <em>When I was fifteen</em> is finished, so the form has to be past simple, and no amount of present relevance will rescue it. That constraint is the one piece of the grammar that is genuinely mechanical, and it is the piece most lessons leave until last.</p>
</div>
<p>She does not explain this. She writes three time phrases on the board, <em>this week</em>, <em>last week</em> and <em>when I was fifteen</em>, and asks which of them is over. The class sorts them in seconds, and the rule follows from the sort rather than from her.</p>
<p>The lesson that ought to follow is not more present perfect. It is the comparison below, because a learner who can only produce the present perfect in isolation has learned a form rather than a choice.</p>
<h2>Present perfect and past simple</h2>
<p>This is the distinction learners ask about, the one examiners test, and the one that takes the longest to settle. The British Council lists four uses of the <a href="https://tefl.ai/past-simple-tense/">past simple</a>, including <q>something that happened once in the past</q>, <q>something that happened several times in the past</q> and <q>something that was true for some time in the past</q>, with <q>expressions with ago</q> as the characteristic marker.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Question</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Present perfect</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Past simple</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Is the time period finished?</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">No. <em>I have seen her this morning</em> is said before lunch.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Yes. <em>I saw her this morning</em> is said in the evening.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Is a specific past time stated?</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">No. Stating one blocks the form.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Usually yes, or it is understood from context.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Where is the listener&#8217;s attention?</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">On the situation now. <em>She has broken her leg</em> means it is still broken.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">On the event then. <em>She broke her leg</em> says nothing about now.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">What happens in a story?</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Opens it. <em>I have just been to Lisbon.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Carries it. <em>I went in May and stayed a week.</em></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Which goes with <em>ago</em>?</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Never.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Always. <em>Ago</em> is the clearest single signal in the pair.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>The fourth row is worth teaching explicitly because it is the pattern of ordinary conversation. The present perfect announces, the past simple narrates. Once a speaker has said <em>I have been to Lisbon</em> and the listener has asked when, everything after that is past simple.</p>
<h2>Commonly confused with</h2>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Present perfect</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Often confused with</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">The distinction</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Present perfect simple</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Present perfect continuous</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The simple form points at the result, the continuous at the activity. <em>I have painted the kitchen</em> means it is finished. <em>I have been painting the kitchen</em> explains why there is paint on your hands and says nothing about whether it is done.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Present perfect</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Past perfect</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Both use a past participle, and they differ only in whether <em>have</em> is present or past. The present perfect looks back from now. The past perfect looks back from a point already in the past.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;"><em>Have been to</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>Have gone to</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">A learner who has been to Berlin is back. A learner who has gone to Berlin is still there. The British Council treats this as a separate point on its present perfect page, and it is worth a slot of its own.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;"><em>For</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>Since</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>For</em> takes a length of time, <em>since</em> takes a starting point. <em>For six years</em> and <em>since 2020</em> can describe the identical stretch, which is why learners swap them.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">British usage</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">American usage</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">With <em>just</em>, <em>already</em> and <em>yet</em>, British English prefers the present perfect and American English accepts the past simple. <em>Did you eat yet</em> is standard in the United States and marked wrong in a Cambridge exam, so the answer a teacher gives depends on what the learner is sitting.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Why it is hard, and for whom</h2>
<p>The difficulty is unevenly distributed, and it is largely predictable from the learner&#8217;s first language. This is <a href="https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/">L1 interference</a> in its most visible form.</p>
<p>Speakers of Spanish, Portuguese, Italian and French all have a compound past built the same way, with an auxiliary plus a participle, and in several of those languages it has drifted into general past narration. The form transfers across intact and the meaning does not, which is why a Spanish speaker will produce <em>I have seen him yesterday</em> with complete confidence. The sentence is not a guess. It is a correct sentence in another language.</p>
<p>Speakers of Slavic languages, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Arabic and Turkish face the opposite problem. There is no compound past to transfer, so there is nothing to interfere, but also nothing to build on. Those learners tend to underuse the present perfect rather than misuse it, defaulting to the past simple everywhere. This is harder to notice in a classroom, because underuse produces sentences that are grammatical.</p>
<p>The practical consequence for a mixed class is that the same lesson is doing two different jobs in the same room, and the error correction that follows it should not be uniform.</p>
<div style="border: 2px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 26px 0; background: #f3fbfa;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #0f2233;">In the classroom</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; line-height: 1.7;">Four decisions that separate a present perfect lesson from a present perfect form drill.</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>Do not teach it as a past tense.</strong> The label is the error. If the class leaves believing the form belongs to the past, every correction after that is fighting the lesson.</li>
<li><strong>Use a timeline with a boundary, not an arrow.</strong> The useful picture is a period that includes now, with the event somewhere inside it. An arrow pointing backwards shows the wrong thing.</li>
<li><strong>Accept the American forms, and say so.</strong> A learner who has heard <em>did you eat yet</em> on television has heard real English. Tell them it is real and tell them which exam will mark it wrong.</li>
<li><strong>Revisit it on the schedule, not on demand.</strong> This is not learned in one lesson by anyone. Plan the return visit now rather than waiting for the errors to prompt it.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2>A note on levels</h2>
<p>Coursebook syllabuses usually introduce the present perfect late at A2 and work on it through B1 and B2, and teachers often report that placement as though the Common European Framework prescribed it. It does not.</p>
<p>The Council of Europe describes the framework&#8217;s six levels, A1 to C2, grouped as <q>Basic User, Independent User and Proficient User</q>, and says the levels are <q>defined through &#8216;can-do&#8217; descriptors</q> that were <q>created without reference to any specific language</q>. There is no CEFR grammar syllabus, and no level at which the present perfect is officially due. The sequencing is publishing convention and classroom experience, which are reasonable grounds, and they are not the same as a standard.</p>
<h2>Sources and further reading</h2>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">The two books below are cited bibliographically because they are print titles with no freely readable edition to link to. Every other source on this list was opened and checked on 5 October 2026.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Source</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">What it provides</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/grammar/english-grammar-reference/present-perfect" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council LearnEnglish, <cite>Present perfect</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The formation sentence and the three use categories quoted above, plus the <em>have been</em> and <em>have gone</em> contrast.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/grammar/english-grammar-reference/past-simple" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council LearnEnglish, <cite>Past simple</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The four past simple uses and the note on <em>ago</em>, used in the comparison table.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Cambridge English, <cite>TKT Glossary</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The definition of aspect and the statement that English has two aspects, continuous and perfect.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.coe.int/en/web/common-european-framework-reference-languages/level-descriptions" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Council of Europe, <cite>CEFR level descriptions</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">That the levels are can-do descriptors created without reference to any specific language, which is the basis of the note on levels above.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Swan, M. (2016), <cite>Practical English Usage</cite>, fourth edition, Oxford University Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The standard teacher reference on the present perfect, including the British and American difference with <em>just</em>, <em>already</em> and <em>yet</em>.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Thornbury, S. (1999), <cite>How to Teach Grammar</cite>, Longman</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The treatment of how a form like this is presented, practised and revisited across a course.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>Is the present perfect a tense or an aspect?</h3>
<p>Strictly it is an aspect carried on the present tense. English has two tenses, present and past, and two aspects, continuous and perfect, and the Cambridge English TKT Glossary defines aspect as a way of looking at verb forms without looking specifically at the time of the event. Almost everyone calls it a tense anyway, including coursebooks and exam syllabuses, and that is fine as a label. It stops being fine when a learner concludes from the word tense that the form belongs to the past.</p>
<h3>What is the difference between the present perfect and the past simple?</h3>
<p>The reliable test is the time reference rather than how long ago the event happened. If the time period is finished, or a specific past time is stated, the past simple is required. If the period still includes now, or no time is stated and the point is the present result, the present perfect is available. <em>I saw him yesterday</em> and <em>I have seen him today</em> can describe events a day apart.</p>
<h3>Why do Spanish and Portuguese speakers overuse the present perfect in English?</h3>
<p>Because their languages have a compound past built the same way, from an auxiliary plus a participle, which in ordinary use covers ground that English gives to the past simple. The form transfers across and the restriction on finished time references does not. The resulting sentence, such as <em>I have seen him yesterday</em>, is a confident translation rather than a careless mistake, which is why it survives correction so well.</p>
<h3>Can you use the present perfect with a specific time?</h3>
<p>No. A stated finished time such as <em>yesterday</em>, <em>last week</em>, <em>in 2019</em> or <em>when I was fifteen</em> blocks the form, however relevant the event still is. Time expressions that include the present, such as <em>today</em>, <em>this week</em> or <em>since Monday</em>, are compatible with it. This is the one part of the grammar that is mechanical, and it is worth teaching as a constraint rather than as a preference.</p>
<h3>When should the present perfect be introduced?</h3>
<p>Coursebooks usually bring it in late at A2 and develop it through B1 and B2. That sequencing is a publishing convention rather than a requirement, because the Common European Framework defines its levels through can-do descriptors created without reference to any specific language and sets no grammar syllabus. In practice the useful trigger is whether learners can already handle the past simple comfortably, since the present perfect is taught against it.</p>
<h3>Is <em>did you eat yet</em> wrong?</h3>
<p>It is standard in American English and non standard in British English, where the present perfect is expected with <em>yet</em>, <em>just</em> and <em>already</em>. A learner preparing for a Cambridge or IELTS exam should use the present perfect. A learner working in the United States will hear the past simple constantly and should know it is correct there. Saying only that it is wrong leaves the learner unable to explain what they have heard.</p>
<h2>Related terms in this glossary</h2>
<ul style="line-height: 1.8;">
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/past-simple-tense/">Past simple tense</a>, the form this one is taught against and the subject of the comparison above.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/">Guided discovery</a>, the inductive stage most often used to get this rule out of a class rather than hand it to them.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/">Concept checking questions</a>, the check that confirms the meaning has landed before any practice begins.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/">L1 interference</a>, which explains why this particular form is far harder for some first language groups than others.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">The full TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</li>
</ul>
<p>For the qualification and career terminology that sits behind classroom practice, including what the teaching awards and accreditation terms mean, see <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL qualifications and terminology explained</a> on The TEFL Institute. For how a grammar stage is timed and written into a plan, see <a href="https://tefl.ie/how-to-write-a-lesson-plan/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">how to write a lesson plan</a> on The TEFL Institute of Ireland.</p>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 8px; padding: 18px 20px; margin: 26px 0; background: #fbfdfd; font-size: 15px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0;">tefl.ai (2026) <cite>Present perfect tense</cite>. TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary. Available at: https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/ (Accessed: 5 October 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">Last updated 5 October 2026. Written by Katie Troy for tefl.ai. All external sources were opened and checked on that date.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">{"@context": "https://schema.org", "@graph": [{"@type": "DefinedTerm", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/#definedterm", "name": "Present Perfect Tense", "alternateName": ["present perfect", "present perfect simple", "perfect aspect", "have plus past participle"], "description": "The present perfect is the English verb form made with have or has plus a past participle, used to link a past action to the present moment. It covers experience up to now, a situation that began in the past and still continues, and a past event whose result matters now. It never takes a finished time reference.", "url": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/", "inDefinedTermSet": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}}, {"@type": "Article", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/#article", "headline": "Present Perfect Tense: Definition, Uses and Classroom Teaching", "description": "The present perfect is the English verb form made with have or has plus a past participle, used to link a past action to the present moment. It covers experience up to now, a situation that began in the past and still continues, and a past event whose result matters now. It never takes a finished time reference.", "mainEntityOfPage": {"@type": "WebPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/"}, "about": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/#definedterm"}, "isPartOf": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}, "inLanguage": "en-GB", "datePublished": "2026-10-05", "dateModified": "2026-10-05", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Katie Troy"}, "publisher": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"}, "citation": [{"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Present perfect", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "British Council"}, "url": "https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/grammar/english-grammar-reference/present-perfect"}, {"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Past simple", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "British Council"}, "url": "https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/grammar/english-grammar-reference/past-simple"}, {"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "TKT Glossary", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Cambridge English"}, "url": "https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf"}, {"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "CEFR level descriptions", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Council of Europe"}, "url": "https://www.coe.int/en/web/common-european-framework-reference-languages/level-descriptions"}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "Practical English Usage", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Michael Swan"}, "datePublished": "2016"}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "How to Teach Grammar", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Scott Thornbury"}, "datePublished": "1999"}]}, {"@type": "FAQPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/#faq", "mainEntity": [{"@type": "Question", "name": "Is the present perfect a tense or an aspect?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Strictly it is an aspect carried on the present tense. English has two tenses, present and past, and two aspects, continuous and perfect, and the Cambridge English TKT Glossary defines aspect as a way of looking at verb forms without looking specifically at the time of the event. Almost everyone calls it a tense anyway, including coursebooks and exam syllabuses, and that is fine as a label. It stops being fine when a learner concludes from the word tense that the form belongs to the past."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "What is the difference between the present perfect and the past simple?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "The reliable test is the time reference rather than how long ago the event happened. If the time period is finished, or a specific past time is stated, the past simple is required. If the period still includes now, or no time is stated and the point is the present result, the present perfect is available. I saw him yesterday and I have seen him today can describe events a day apart."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Why do Spanish and Portuguese speakers overuse the present perfect in English?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Because their languages have a compound past built the same way, from an auxiliary plus a participle, which in ordinary use covers ground that English gives to the past simple. The form transfers across and the restriction on finished time references does not. The resulting sentence, such as I have seen him yesterday, is a confident translation rather than a careless mistake, which is why it survives correction so well."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Can you use the present perfect with a specific time?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "No. A stated finished time such as yesterday, last week, in 2019 or when I was fifteen blocks the form, however relevant the event still is. Time expressions that include the present, such as today, this week or since Monday, are compatible with it. This is the one part of the grammar that is mechanical, and it is worth teaching as a constraint rather than as a preference."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "When should the present perfect be introduced?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Coursebooks usually bring it in late at A2 and develop it through B1 and B2. That sequencing is a publishing convention rather than a requirement, because the Common European Framework defines its levels through can-do descriptors created without reference to any specific language and sets no grammar syllabus. In practice the useful trigger is whether learners can already handle the past simple comfortably, since the present perfect is taught against it."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Is did you eat yet wrong?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "It is standard in American English and non standard in British English, where the present perfect is expected with yet, just and already. A learner preparing for a Cambridge or IELTS exam should use the present perfect. A learner working in the United States will hear the past simple constantly and should know it is correct there. Saying only that it is wrong leaves the learner unable to explain what they have heard."}}]}, {"@type": "BreadcrumbList", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/#glossary-breadcrumb", "itemListElement": [{"@type": "ListItem", "position": 1, "name": "tefl.ai", "item": "https://tefl.ai/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 2, "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary", "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 3, "name": "Present Perfect Tense", "item": "https://tefl.ai/present-perfect-tense/"}]}]}</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Guided Discovery</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 02 Oct 2026 19:36:25 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[grammar lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[lesson planning]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3183</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Guided discovery is an inductive teaching technique in which the teacher presents learners with examples of a target language item and then leads them, through questions and tasks, to work out the rule for themselves before any explanation is given. The teacher directs the route; the learners state the rule.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-size: 21px; line-height: 1.6; font-weight: 600; color: #0f2233; margin: 0 0 24px;">Guided discovery is an inductive teaching technique in which the teacher presents learners with examples of a target language item and then leads them, through questions and tasks, to work out the rule for themselves before any explanation is given. The teacher directs the route; the learners state the rule.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 24px 26px; margin: 0 0 30px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li>Examples come first, the rule comes last, and the learners are the ones who say it.</li>
<li>It is guided, not open. The teacher chooses the examples, writes the questions and decides what counts as the right answer.</li>
<li>The examples are the lesson. A careless set of examples produces a confident wrong rule.</li>
<li>It costs more class time than an explanation, so it is used on items worth the time rather than on everything.</li>
</ul>
<p style="margin: 16px 0 0; font-size: 15px;"><a style="color: #00e3c4;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Part of the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a></p>
</div>
<h2>Where the term comes from</h2>
<p>The Cambridge English <em>TKT Glossary</em>, the reference list used across the Teaching Knowledge Test, defines guided discovery as <q>an approach to teaching in which a teacher provides examples of the target language and then guides the learners to work out the language rules for themselves</q>. Its worked case is a reading article containing examples of reported speech: learners find the examples, then answer questions about the grammar rules and the meaning of those examples.</p>
<p>The British Council Teaching Knowledge Database makes the contrast explicit. Guided discovery, it says, <q>can be compared to didactic instruction, where the teacher sets out rules for students and then asks them to practice</q>. Its example is a problem page carrying several instances of the second conditional, from which learners identify the structure and then the rules for forming it.</p>
<p>The wider idea is older than English language teaching and belongs to Jerome Bruner, whose 1961 paper <em>The act of discovery</em> argued that a rule arrived at by the learner is better retained than a rule received. English language teaching took the principle and added the word that does the work in it, which is <em>guided</em>. The route is set in advance by somebody who already knows where it ends.</p>
<h2>Inductive and deductive, in the British Council wording</h2>
<p>Guided discovery is the classroom form of an inductive approach, and the cleanest statement of that pair is the British Council one.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Approach</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">What it is</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">The teacher&#8217;s role</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Inductive</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><q>The process of discovering general principles from facts.</q> Learners find the rule by looking at examples.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">To supply the language learners need in order to discover the rule, to guide them in discovery if necessary, and then to provide practice.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Deductive</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><q>The process of applying general principles to use.</q> Learners are taught the rule and then apply it.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">To present the rules and organise the practice.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">Wordings quoted from the British Council TeachingEnglish page <cite>Presenting new language</cite>. Inductive is the orientation; guided discovery is one way of running it in a room.</p>
<h2>How it is used in practice</h2>
<p>A guided discovery stage usually sits where a presentation stage would sit, at the front of a lesson, and it runs in four moves.</p>
<ol style="line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>Choose the examples before anything else.</strong> Six to ten short sentences, all carrying the target item, written or chosen so that the only thing that varies between them is the thing you want noticed. This is the part that decides whether the stage works.</li>
<li><strong>Give a sorting task, not a question.</strong> Learners match the examples to two timelines, two pictures, two situations or two headings. Sorting forces attention onto the distinction without asking anyone to name it.</li>
<li><strong>Ask two or three questions that point at the difference.</strong> Short, answerable from the examples on the page, and in language simpler than the rule itself.</li>
<li><strong>Let the class state the rule, then tidy the wording.</strong> The learners supply the content. The teacher supplies the terminology and the correction, and only at this point.</li>
</ol>
<p>Pair or small group work is the norm at steps two and three, which is the point the British Council makes when it notes that guided discovery <q>encourages independence, makes learning more memorable, and if analysis is done in groups is a meaningful communicative task</q>.</p>
<h2>A worked classroom example</h2>
<p>A B1 group of eleven adults in an evening class in Galway. The target is the difference between the present perfect and the past simple with a stated length of time. The teacher wants the class to arrive at the idea that one of them describes a situation that is still true and the other one does not.</p>
<p>She puts six sentences about the same invented person on a handout:</p>
<div style="border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; background: #f3fbfa; padding: 14px 18px; margin: 16px 0; line-height: 1.8;">
<p style="margin: 0;">She has lived in Galway for ten years.<br />
She lived in Cork for three years.<br />
She has worked at the hospital since 2019.<br />
She worked at the chemist for eight months.<br />
She has played in the same band for six years.<br />
She played camogie for two seasons.</p>
</div>
<p>The sorting task is two headings on the board, <em>still true today</em> and <em>finished</em>, and three minutes in pairs. Every pair sorts all six correctly. Then three questions: which column has <em>has</em> in it, which column tells you the person is still there, and does the sentence tell you when it started or when it stopped.</p>
<p>A learner states the rule and she states it clearly: the present perfect is for long things, the past simple is for short things.</p>
<p><strong>Every learner in the room agrees, and the rule is wrong.</strong> It is also the only rule the handout supports. Ten years, 2019 and six years are all long. Three years, eight months and two seasons are all shorter. The sorting worked, the questions worked, and the class extracted a pattern that was genuinely there in the data they were given, because the teacher had chosen her examples for realism rather than for contrast.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 22px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The repair, and why it is not an explanation</p>
<p style="margin: 0; line-height: 1.7;">She does not correct the rule and she does not reach for the words <em>unfinished time period</em>. She writes one more sentence under the handout, <em>She has lived here since Tuesday</em>, and asks the class which column it belongs in. The room puts it under <em>still true today</em> without hesitating, and the long and short rule dies on its own in about four seconds. The class then restates the rule, and this time it is about whether the situation is still running.</p>
</div>
<p>Two minutes of concept checking follow, because a rule a class has stated is not yet a rule the class can use. That is the division of labour between the two techniques: guided discovery gets the rule out, <a href="https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/">concept checking questions</a> confirm the meaning has landed.</p>
<h2>The examples are the lesson</h2>
<p>The usual advice about guided discovery is about questioning technique, and questioning technique is the easy part. The part that decides the outcome happens before the class walks in, when the teacher chooses which six sentences go on the page.</p>
<p>A set of examples is a small body of evidence, and learners do with it exactly what anyone does with evidence: they find the strongest pattern in it. If an irrelevant feature is present in every example, that feature becomes the rule. The Galway class did nothing wrong. They read the data correctly.</p>
<p>This produces the characteristic failure of the technique, and it is worse than the failure of a plain explanation. A learner who misunderstands an explanation holds the mistaken rule loosely and will drop it when corrected. <strong>A learner who derived a wrong rule from evidence holds it with the confidence of someone who worked it out, and will defend it.</strong> The discovery that makes the right rule stick makes the wrong one stick too.</p>
<p>The practical consequence is a design rule rather than a teaching tip. Build the example set so that the target feature is the only thing that varies, then look over the finished set and ask what other pattern a clever learner could extract from it. If one is there, break it with an extra example before the lesson rather than after it.</p>
<h2>Commonly confused with</h2>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Guided discovery</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Often confused with</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">The distinction</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Guided discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Discovery learning, or pure discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Pure discovery leaves learners to explore without a set route. Guided discovery supplies the examples, the task and the questions. The research that is usually quoted against discovery is about the unguided version, and it reports that the guided version did better.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Guided discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Eliciting</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Eliciting draws out language or knowledge the teacher believes some learners already hold. Guided discovery builds a rule the class does not yet hold, out of evidence on the page. Eliciting is a move that takes seconds; guided discovery is a stage that takes a stretch of the lesson.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Guided discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">An inductive approach</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Inductive describes the direction of travel, from examples to rule. Guided discovery is one procedure for travelling it. All guided discovery is inductive; not all inductive teaching is guided discovery.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Guided discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The presentation stage of PPP</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">A presentation stage states the rule and then practises it, which is deductive. A guided discovery stage can occupy the same slot in a lesson and reach the same rule from the other end.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Guided discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Concept checking questions</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Guided discovery comes before the rule exists in the room and produces it. Concept checking comes after and tests whether the meaning is held. They sit minutes apart and are frequently run back to back.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Guided discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Test teach test</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Test teach test opens with a production task to find out what learners can already do, and the teaching is chosen afterwards. Guided discovery fixes the target in advance and works towards it.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>What the evidence actually supports</h2>
<p>Guided discovery is often defended, and attacked, with research that is not about it.</p>
<p>Richard Mayer&#8217;s 2004 paper in <em>American Psychologist</em>, <cite>Should there be a three-strikes rule against pure discovery learning?</cite>, reviews three decades of studies on problem solving rules, conservation strategies and programming. Its conclusion is specific: in each case <q>guided discovery was more effective than pure discovery in helping students learn and transfer</q>. The paper is a case against unguided exploration and, in passing, a point in favour of the guided version.</p>
<p>Kirschner, Sweller and Clark&#8217;s 2006 paper in <em>Educational Psychologist</em> goes further against minimal guidance, and adds the qualification that matters most in a language classroom: <q>the advantage of guidance begins to recede only when learners have sufficiently high prior knowledge to provide internal guidance</q>. Read plainly, that is an argument for heavier guidance with beginners and lighter guidance with learners who already have something to work from.</p>
<p>Two honest limits follow from this, and neither is usually stated on pages about the technique.</p>
<ul style="line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>None of that research is about English language teaching.</strong> It is educational psychology on school and university learners in other subjects. There is no body of controlled trials showing that a guided discovery stage beats a clear explanation for teaching a grammar point to an adult language class, and this page does not claim one.</li>
<li><strong>Some learners do not want it.</strong> The British Council records this directly, noting that <q>it is important, however, to understand that some learners are resistant to this approach</q>. Learners who have been taught deductively for years can read a discovery stage as the teacher withholding an answer they are paid to give.</li>
</ul>
<p>The defensible claim is the narrow one. Guided discovery is a reasonable use of class time when the rule is worth the minutes, when the class has enough language to read the examples, and when the teacher has built an example set that cannot support a second interpretation.</p>
<div style="border: 2px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 26px 0; background: #f3fbfa;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #0f2233;">In the classroom</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; line-height: 1.7;">Three decisions make the difference between a discovery stage and twenty wasted minutes.</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li><strong>Set a time limit and hold it.</strong> If the rule has not surfaced in the time you allowed, say it yourself and move to practice. A stage that overruns has already cost more than the explanation it replaced.</li>
<li><strong>Nominate.</strong> A rule stated by the strongest learner in the room is evidence about one person. Ask two more learners to restate it in their own words before you accept it.</li>
<li><strong>Write the agreed rule up.</strong> Learners who worked a rule out need to see it fixed in a form they can copy, or half the room leaves with a version of it.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2>Sources and further reading</h2>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">The three books below are cited bibliographically because they are print titles with no freely readable edition to link to. Every other source on this list was opened and checked on 2 October 2026.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0; font-size: 15px;">
<tbody>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">Source</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #c9d2d8;">What it provides</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Cambridge English, <cite>TKT Glossary</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The assessment body definition of guided discovery, and the reported speech example.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/guided-discovery" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council, Teaching Knowledge Database, <cite>Guided discovery</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The contrast with didactic instruction, the second conditional example, and the note on learner resistance.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/knowing-subject/presenting-new-language" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council, <cite>Presenting new language</cite></a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The inductive and deductive definitions quoted in the table above.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ684214" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Mayer, R. E. (2004), <cite>Should there be a three-strikes rule against pure discovery learning?</cite>, American Psychologist 59(1), 14 to 19</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The finding that guided discovery outperformed pure discovery across three research literatures.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ736299" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Kirschner, P. A., Sweller, J. and Clark, R. E. (2006), <cite>Why minimal guidance during instruction does not work</cite>, Educational Psychologist 41(2), 75 to 86</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The case against minimal guidance, and the prior knowledge qualification.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Bruner, J. S. (1961), <cite>The act of discovery</cite>, Harvard Educational Review 31(1), 21 to 32</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The original argument that a rule reached by the learner is better retained.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Scrivener, J. (2011), <cite>Learning Teaching</cite>, third edition, Macmillan</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">A practical treatment of guided discovery stages and the questioning that drives them.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fbfb;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Thornbury, S. (1999), <cite>How to Teach Grammar</cite>, Longman</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The standard discussion of inductive and deductive grammar teaching and the trade-offs between them.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>Is guided discovery the same as inductive teaching?</h3>
<p>Not quite. Inductive describes the direction, from examples towards a rule. Guided discovery is one procedure for running that direction in a classroom, with chosen examples, a sorting or matching task and directed questions. Every guided discovery stage is inductive, but a teacher can work inductively in looser ways that would not be called guided discovery.</p>
<h3>Does guided discovery work with beginners?</h3>
<p>It works less well, and the research explains why. Kirschner, Sweller and Clark found that the advantage of guidance recedes only once learners have enough prior knowledge to guide themselves, which means the lower the level, the heavier the guidance needs to be. With genuine beginners the examples often cannot be read at all, and a short clear presentation is usually the better use of the time.</p>
<h3>How long should a guided discovery stage take?</h3>
<p>Between ten and twenty minutes for a single grammar point in a sixty minute class is typical, including the pair work and the restatement. Set the limit in advance. If the rule has not surfaced within it, state the rule and move to practice rather than extending the stage, because the time saved by an explanation is the whole argument against discovery in the first place.</p>
<h3>What happens if the class works out the wrong rule?</h3>
<p>Add an example that the wrong rule cannot account for, and let the class see it fail. Correcting the rule directly wastes the stage and teaches the class that the discovery was decorative. A wrong rule reached from evidence is also held more firmly than one misheard from a teacher, so it needs disconfirming evidence rather than contradiction.</p>
<h3>Is guided discovery better than simply explaining the rule?</h3>
<p>There is no reliable evidence either way for language classrooms specifically. The research that is usually cited compares guided discovery with unguided discovery, not with clear explanation, and it favours guidance in both comparisons. What can be said is that discovery costs more class time, so it is worth spending on rules that reward attention and not on items a single sentence would settle.</p>
<h3>Can guided discovery be used for vocabulary and pronunciation, or only grammar?</h3>
<p>It is used for all three. Vocabulary works well when the target is a pattern rather than an item, such as how a set of phrasal verbs behaves with objects, or the shades of meaning across a group of near synonyms. Pronunciation works when learners sort recorded or written examples by a feature such as stress placement or a voiced and unvoiced contrast, then state what governs it.</p>
<h2>Related terms in this glossary</h2>
<ul style="line-height: 1.8;">
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/eliciting/">Eliciting</a>, the shorter move that draws out language learners may already have, and the technique guided discovery is most often confused with.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/">Concept checking questions</a>, the check that normally follows a discovery stage to confirm the meaning has landed.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">Presentation, practice, production</a>, the deductive lesson shape whose first stage guided discovery most often replaces.</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">The full TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</li>
</ul>
<p>For the qualification and career terminology that sits behind classroom practice, including what the teaching awards and accreditation terms mean, see <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL qualifications and terminology explained</a> on The TEFL Institute. For how a discovery stage is written into a lesson plan, see <a href="https://tefl.ie/how-to-write-a-lesson-plan/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">how to write a lesson plan</a> on The TEFL Institute of Ireland.</p>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 8px; padding: 18px 20px; margin: 26px 0; background: #fbfdfd; font-size: 15px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .12em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0;">tefl.ai (2026) <cite>Guided discovery</cite>. TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary. Available at: https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/ (Accessed: 2 October 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75;">Last updated 2 October 2026. Written by Katie Troy for tefl.ai. All external sources were opened and checked on that date.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">{"@context": "https://schema.org", "@graph": [{"@type": "DefinedTerm", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/#definedterm", "name": "Guided Discovery", "alternateName": ["guided discovery learning", "inductive teaching", "discovery approach", "guided discovery technique"], "description": "Guided discovery is an inductive teaching technique in which the teacher presents learners with examples of a target language item and then leads them, through questions and tasks, to work out the rule for themselves before any explanation is given. The teacher directs the route; the learners state the rule.", "url": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/", "inDefinedTermSet": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}}, {"@type": "Article", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/#article", "headline": "Guided Discovery: Definition, Classroom Example and Limits", "description": "Guided discovery is an inductive teaching technique in which the teacher presents learners with examples of a target language item and then leads them, through questions and tasks, to work out the rule for themselves before any explanation is given. The teacher directs the route; the learners state the rule.", "mainEntityOfPage": {"@type": "WebPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/"}, "about": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/#definedterm"}, "isPartOf": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}, "inLanguage": "en-GB", "datePublished": "2026-10-02", "dateModified": "2026-10-02", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Katie Troy"}, "publisher": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"}, "citation": [{"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "TKT Glossary", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Cambridge English"}, "url": "https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf"}, {"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Guided discovery, Teaching Knowledge Database", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "British Council"}, "url": "https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/guided-discovery"}, {"@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Presenting new language", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "British Council"}, "url": "https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/knowing-subject/presenting-new-language"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "Should there be a three-strikes rule against pure discovery learning? The case for guided methods of instruction", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Richard E. Mayer"}, "datePublished": "2004", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "American Psychologist"}, "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ684214"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "Why Minimal Guidance during Instruction Does Not Work", "author": [{"@type": "Person", "name": "Paul A. Kirschner"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "John Sweller"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "Richard E. Clark"}], "datePublished": "2006", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "Educational Psychologist"}, "url": "https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ736299"}, {"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "The act of discovery", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Jerome S. Bruner"}, "datePublished": "1961", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "Harvard Educational Review"}}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "Learning Teaching", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Jim Scrivener"}, "datePublished": "2011"}, {"@type": "Book", "name": "How to Teach Grammar", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Scott Thornbury"}, "datePublished": "1999"}]}, {"@type": "FAQPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/#faq", "mainEntity": [{"@type": "Question", "name": "Is guided discovery the same as inductive teaching?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Not quite. Inductive describes the direction, from examples towards a rule. Guided discovery is one procedure for running that direction in a classroom, with chosen examples, a sorting or matching task and directed questions. Every guided discovery stage is inductive, but a teacher can work inductively in looser ways that would not be called guided discovery."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Does guided discovery work with beginners?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "It works less well, and the research explains why. Kirschner, Sweller and Clark found that the advantage of guidance recedes only once learners have enough prior knowledge to guide themselves, which means the lower the level, the heavier the guidance needs to be. With genuine beginners the examples often cannot be read at all, and a short clear presentation is usually the better use of the time."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "How long should a guided discovery stage take?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Between ten and twenty minutes for a single grammar point in a sixty minute class is typical, including the pair work and the restatement. Set the limit in advance. If the rule has not surfaced within it, state the rule and move to practice rather than extending the stage, because the time saved by an explanation is the whole argument against discovery in the first place."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "What happens if the class works out the wrong rule?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Add an example that the wrong rule cannot account for, and let the class see it fail. Correcting the rule directly wastes the stage and teaches the class that the discovery was decorative. A wrong rule reached from evidence is also held more firmly than one misheard from a teacher, so it needs disconfirming evidence rather than contradiction."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Is guided discovery better than simply explaining the rule?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "There is no reliable evidence either way for language classrooms specifically. The research that is usually cited compares guided discovery with unguided discovery, not with clear explanation, and it favours guidance in both comparisons. What can be said is that discovery costs more class time, so it is worth spending on rules that reward attention and not on items a single sentence would settle."}}, {"@type": "Question", "name": "Can guided discovery be used for vocabulary and pronunciation, or only grammar?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "It is used for all three. Vocabulary works well when the target is a pattern rather than an item, such as how a set of phrasal verbs behaves with objects, or the shades of meaning across a group of near synonyms. Pronunciation works when learners sort recorded or written examples by a feature such as stress placement or a voiced and unvoiced contrast, then state what governs it."}}]}, {"@type": "BreadcrumbList", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/#glossary-breadcrumb", "itemListElement": [{"@type": "ListItem", "position": 1, "name": "tefl.ai", "item": "https://tefl.ai/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 2, "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary", "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"}, {"@type": "ListItem", "position": 3, "name": "Guided Discovery", "item": "https://tefl.ai/guided-discovery/"}]}]}</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Concept Checking Questions (CCQs)</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Thu, 01 Oct 2026 06:57:33 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[lesson planning]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[questioning techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3171</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[A concept checking question, usually shortened to CCQ, is a short question a teacher asks to confirm that learners have understood the meaning of a new word, phrase or structure, rather than asking them whether they understand. A good one uses simpler language than the target item, avoids containing the target item, and expects a brief answer.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-size: 20px; line-height: 1.6; font-weight: 600; color: #0f2233; margin: 0 0 22px;">A concept checking question, usually shortened to CCQ, is a short question a teacher asks to confirm that learners have understood the meaning of a new word, phrase or structure, rather than asking them whether they understand. A good one uses simpler language than the target item, avoids containing the target item, and expects a brief answer.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f4; border-radius: 12px; padding: 22px 24px; margin: 0 0 28px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .1em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 12px; line-height: 1.6; color: #e8f6f4;">Asking a class whether they understand produces a polite yes and tells you nothing. A CCQ replaces that question with two or three small ones whose answers only a learner who has grasped the meaning can give. The technique belongs to the clarification stage of a lesson, immediately after new language has been presented in context and before learners practise it.</p>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: 15px;"><a style="color: #00e3c4;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Part of the tefl.ai glossary of TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques</a></p>
</div>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">How concept checking questions are used in practice</h2>
<p>The problem a CCQ solves is narrow and very common. A teacher presents a structure, explains it, and then asks the class whether that is clear. Almost everyone says yes. Some say yes because they do understand, some because they do not want to hold the lesson up, some because they believe they understand and do not, and some because saying no in front of a class of peers costs more than staying quiet. The answer carries no information, so the teacher moves on to practice on top of a misunderstanding that surfaces twenty minutes later as a pattern of identical errors.</p>
<p>A CCQ removes the social pressure by not asking about understanding at all. It asks about the situation. If the target sentence is <em>She must be stuck in traffic</em>, the class is not asked what <em>must</em> means; they are asked whether the speaker knows for certain, and whether the speaker has a reason for thinking it. Those are questions a learner who has grasped deduction can answer and a learner who has read <em>must</em> as obligation cannot.</p>
<p>The Cambridge English TKT glossary makes the distinction between the question and the wider habit. A concept question is the individual question. Concept checking is the technique, and it includes concept questions alongside realia, timelines, asking learners to explain the meaning in their own words, and asking learners to repeat instructions back. The British Council&#8217;s Teaching Knowledge Database describes concept checking as especially important in inductive teaching, where learners work a rule out from examples rather than being given it, because in that case nobody has yet said out loud what the rule is.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">Building a CCQ in four steps</h2>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0 26px; font-size: 16px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Step</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What you do</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Worked on <em>She must be stuck in traffic</em></th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">1. State the meaning in plain words</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Write what the item means using language a learner at this level would understand. If you cannot state it simply, you cannot check it.</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The speaker is almost sure, and the reason is something she has noticed.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">2. Break it into separate ideas</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Most items carry two or three ideas. Each one becomes its own question, because a question that carries two ideas cannot tell you which one failed.</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Near certainty. Based on evidence. Not an instruction and not a fact.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">3. Turn each idea into a short question</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Yes or no, either or, or a single word. Keep the question simpler than the target, and keep the target item out of it.</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Am I sure she is in traffic? Do I have a reason for thinking it? Am I telling her to do something?</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">4. Predict the answers before the lesson</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Write the expected answer beside each question. A question whose answer you cannot predict cleanly is ambiguous, and ambiguity in a CCQ is indistinguishable from a learner error.</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Almost. Yes. No.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>The British Council&#8217;s guidance on checking understanding adds the constraints that make these questions work: keep the language simple enough that no difficult English is needed to answer, keep the new grammar out of the question, avoid unfamiliar vocabulary, bring out basic concepts such as time, and ask enough questions to cover several aspects of the item and several learners.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">A worked classroom example</h2>
<p>An intermediate evening class of fourteen adults in Galway, ninety minutes, the target language a set of deduction modals. The teacher has put <em>She must be stuck in traffic</em> on the board inside a short context: two colleagues waiting in a meeting room, the third one late, her car normally parked outside and not there. The teacher then runs three concept checking questions.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0 26px; font-size: 16px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">The question</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Expected answer</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What it is checking</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Am I one hundred per cent sure she is in traffic?</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">No, almost sure</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">That this is a strong guess and not a fact</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Do I have a reason for saying it?</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Yes, her car is gone</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">That the guess rests on evidence, which is what separates it from a wild guess</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Am I telling her to sit in traffic?</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">No</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">That this is deduction and not obligation, the confusion the whole check exists for</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>The first two questions came back clean. The third split the room. Roughly half the class answered yes, and two learners produced <em>She must go to work</em> as an example a minute later. That is the useful part of the lesson, and it is the part that would have been invisible behind a nod.</p>
<p>What the teacher did next is the load bearing move. She did not explain the grammar again, and she did not reach for the term <em>modal of deduction</em>. She went back to the context and added one line to it: the colleague phones and says she is on the motorway. Then she asked a fourth question, whether the speaker had been right, and a fifth, whether the speaker had known. Both answers landed. The class had not misunderstood an explanation; they had never been given a situation in which a guess and an instruction look different, and the fix was a situation rather than a rule.</p>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; background: #fbfdfd; border-radius: 10px; padding: 18px 22px; margin: 24px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .08em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">The caveat this example carries</p>
<p style="margin: 0;">A chorus of correct answers is weak evidence. In a class of fourteen, the three fastest learners answer, the rest hear the answer and repeat it, and the teacher records a pass for a check that only three people sat. If a CCQ is worth asking it is worth nominating for, and it is worth asking the same question of a learner who has not spoken yet. That is the part of concept checking most often dropped under time pressure, and dropping it quietly converts a diagnostic technique into a ritual.</p>
</div>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">Commonly confused with</h2>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0 26px; font-size: 16px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Not the same as</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">The difference</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">An instruction checking question (ICQ)</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">An ICQ checks that learners know what to do: who they are working with, how long they have, whether they write notes or sentences. It comes before an activity. A CCQ checks that they know what the language means, and it comes before practice. The two are the commonest pair for trainees to mix up, and using an ICQ where a CCQ is needed is how a class ends up practising a form it has misread.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">Asking whether the class understands</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The British Council notes plainly that this question can be answered yes without indicating any real understanding. It is not a weaker check; it is not a check at all, because the answer is the same whatever the truth.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;"><a href="https://tefl.ai/eliciting/">Eliciting</a></td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Eliciting draws language or ideas out of learners that they may already hold. Concept checking confirms that language the teacher has just supplied has landed. Eliciting looks forward to what the class can produce; a CCQ looks back at what has just been presented. They often run one after the other in the same two minutes, which is why they get merged.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">A comprehension question about a text</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">A comprehension question asks what happened in a reading or listening passage. A CCQ asks what a language item means. A learner can answer every comprehension question on a page and still not know what one structure in it is doing.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">A question about form</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Asking which tense a sentence uses, or what the auxiliary is, tests metalanguage. It is a legitimate check of form, and it is not a concept check. Learners can name the present perfect and still use it for finished past time.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; font-weight: 600;">A display question in general</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Classroom research divides teacher questions into display questions, where the teacher already knows the answer, and referential questions, where the teacher does not. Every CCQ is a display question, but most display questions are not CCQs. Studies of classroom discourse have repeatedly found display questions to be the more frequent of the two, which is worth knowing before adding more of them.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">Where the technique comes from, and what it does not do</h2>
<p>Concept checking has no single author. It grew inside British initial teacher training in the 1980s and 1990s, where trainees were being asked to clarify meaning before practice and needed something better than an explanation followed by a hopeful question. It reached print through the standard training handbooks of that tradition, and it is now embedded in the Cambridge assessment vocabulary: the TKT glossary lists both <em>concept question</em> and <em>concept checking</em> as terms candidates are expected to know.</p>
<p>Two honest limits are worth stating on a page that recommends the technique. The first is that concept checking has a long practitioner literature and no body of controlled trials showing that classes whose teachers use CCQs learn more than classes whose teachers clarify meaning some other way. It is a discipline that makes understanding visible at the moment it is cheapest to repair, not a measured intervention, and no effect size is claimed for it anywhere on this page.</p>
<p>The second limit is that a CCQ can only check a concept the teacher has already analysed correctly. Writing the questions is the hard part, and it happens at the planning desk rather than in the room. A teacher who has not worked out that <em>must</em> in this sentence is a deduction will write three fluent questions about obligation, the class will answer all three correctly, and the check will confirm a misunderstanding rather than catch it.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">Sources</h2>
<p style="font-size: 15px; color: #6b7c88; margin: 0 0 14px;">Every source below with a link was opened and confirmed live on 30 September 2026. The final three entries are books and are cited bibliographically, without a link, because no freely available authoritative copy exists.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 26px; font-size: 15px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Source</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What it supports</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Cambridge English, TKT Glossary of English Language Teaching Terminology</a></td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The definitions of <em>concept question</em> and <em>concept checking</em>, and the <em>used to</em> example</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/c/concept-questions" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council TeachingEnglish, Teaching Knowledge Database, Concept questions</a></td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">That the question tests the key concepts of the item and normally requires a yes or no or short answer</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/c/concept-checking" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council TeachingEnglish, Teaching Knowledge Database, Concept checking</a></td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">That asking whether learners understand can be answered yes without indicating understanding, and that concept checking matters most in inductive teaching</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/managing-lesson/checking-understanding" target="_blank" rel="noopener">British Council TeachingEnglish, Checking understanding</a></td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The five constraints on a good concept question, and the point that writing them trains a teacher to grade their own language</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><a href="https://files.eric.ed.gov/fulltext/ED500840.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Shomoossi, N. (1997), The Effect of Teacher&#8217;s Questioning Behaviour on EFL Classroom Interaction, ERIC ED500840</a></td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The display and referential question distinction, and the finding that display questions were the more frequent type in the classrooms observed</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Scrivener, J. (2011), <em>Learning Teaching</em>, third edition, Macmillan</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The clarification stage of a lesson and the place of checking within it</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Thornbury, S. (1999), <em>How to Teach Grammar</em>, Longman</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Breaking a structure into its underlying propositions before checking it</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #fbfdfd;">
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Ur, P. (2012), <em>A Course in English Language Teaching</em>, second edition, Cambridge University Press</td>
<td style="padding: 12px 14px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Teacher questioning as classroom practice, including distribution of questions around a class</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; background: #fbfdfd; border-radius: 10px; padding: 18px 22px; margin: 24px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .08em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">In the classroom tomorrow</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li>Write the CCQs into the lesson plan, with the expected answer beside each one. Questions invented in the room tend to contain the target language.</li>
<li>Two or three questions per item. One can be guessed at even odds, and eight becomes an interrogation.</li>
<li>Nominate rather than accept the chorus, and ask at least one of the questions of a learner who has not yet spoken.</li>
<li>If the answers split, go back to the context and add to it. Repeating the explanation louder is the reflex, and it rarely works.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 22px 0 8px;">What is a concept checking question?</h3>
<p>A concept checking question is a short question a teacher asks to confirm that learners have understood the meaning of a new word, phrase or structure, rather than asking them directly whether they understand. It uses simpler language than the target item, does not contain the target item, and expects a brief answer such as yes, no, or a single word.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 22px 0 8px;">How many concept checking questions should a teacher ask?</h3>
<p>Two or three for each item is the working rule. A single yes or no question can be answered correctly by guessing, so it is weak evidence on its own, while a long run of questions turns clarification into interrogation and eats the practice time the check was meant to protect.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 22px 0 8px;">What makes a bad concept checking question?</h3>
<p>Four faults account for most of them: the question contains the target language, so a learner can answer by recognition; the question uses harder words than the item being checked; the question carries two ideas at once, so a wrong answer does not say which idea failed; or the question supplies its own answer through a tag or an intonation pattern.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 22px 0 8px;">What is the difference between a CCQ and an ICQ?</h3>
<p>A concept checking question checks that learners understand what a piece of language means. An instruction checking question checks that they understand what they have been asked to do in an activity, such as who they are working with or how long they have. CCQs come before practice; ICQs come before a task.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 22px 0 8px;">When in a lesson should concept checking questions be asked?</h3>
<p>Directly after the meaning of the new language has been presented in a context and before learners move into controlled practice. That is the window in which a misunderstanding is cheap to repair. Once a class has drilled or produced a form it has misread, the teacher is no longer correcting a concept but unpicking a habit.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 22px 0 8px;">Can concept checking questions be used with beginners?</h3>
<p>Yes, and they matter more at low levels, because a beginner has fewer ways to signal confusion. The constraint is that the question must be answerable with the English the class already has, so at beginner level checks lean on yes or no answers, either or choices, pictures, real objects and gesture rather than on wording alone.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 26px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 12px;">Related terms</h2>
<p>Concept checking sits between two techniques in the same stage of a lesson. <a href="https://tefl.ai/eliciting/">Eliciting</a> draws language out of learners before the teacher supplies it, and a concept check confirms that what was supplied has landed. <a href="https://tefl.ai/drilling/">Drilling</a> comes next, and the order matters: a class that drills a form it has misunderstood is rehearsing the misunderstanding. In the <a href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">presentation, practice, production</a> framework the check belongs at the end of the presentation stage, and every entry in this set is listed in the <a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">tefl.ai glossary of teaching methods and classroom techniques</a>.</p>
<p>For the qualification vocabulary that sits behind all of this, including what CELTA, TESOL and a Level 5 diploma each are, see The TEFL Institute&#8217;s <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">guide to TEFL qualifications and terminology</a>. Teachers training in Ireland can read The TEFL Institute of Ireland on <a href="https://tefl.ie/level-5-tefl-in-ireland-who-recognises-it/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Level 5 TEFL in Ireland and who recognises it</a>.</p>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #ffffff; border-radius: 10px; padding: 18px 22px; margin: 28px 0;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .08em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.6;">tefl.ai (2026) <em>Concept Checking Questions (CCQs)</em>, TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary. Available at: https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/ (Accessed: 30 September 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #6b7c88; margin: 0;">Last updated 30 September 2026. Sources checked live on the same date.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">
{
  "@context": "https://schema.org",
  "@graph": [
    {
      "@type": "DefinedTerm",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/#definedterm",
      "name": "Concept Checking Questions (CCQs)",
      "alternateName": ["CCQ", "concept question", "concept checking", "checking questions"],
      "description": "A concept checking question, usually shortened to CCQ, is a short question a teacher asks to confirm that learners have understood the meaning of a new word, phrase or structure, rather than asking them whether they understand. A good one uses simpler language than the target item, avoids containing the target item, and expects a brief answer.",
      "url": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/",
      "inDefinedTermSet": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary" }
    },
    {
      "@type": "Article",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/#article",
      "headline": "Concept Checking Questions (CCQs)",
      "description": "What a concept checking question is, how to build one in four steps, a worked classroom example, and how CCQs differ from ICQs, eliciting and comprehension questions.",
      "mainEntityOfPage": { "@type": "WebPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/" },
      "about": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/#definedterm" },
      "isPartOf": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary" },
      "inLanguage": "en-GB",
      "datePublished": "2026-09-30",
      "dateModified": "2026-09-30",
      "author": { "@type": "Person", "name": "Katie Troy" },
      "publisher": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization" },
      "citation": [
        { "@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "TKT Glossary of English Language Teaching Terminology", "publisher": "Cambridge English", "url": "https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/images/22184-tkt-glossary-document.pdf" },
        { "@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Concept questions, Teaching Knowledge Database", "publisher": "British Council TeachingEnglish", "url": "https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/c/concept-questions" },
        { "@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Concept checking, Teaching Knowledge Database", "publisher": "British Council TeachingEnglish", "url": "https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/c/concept-checking" },
        { "@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "Checking understanding", "publisher": "British Council TeachingEnglish", "url": "https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/managing-lesson/checking-understanding" },
        { "@type": "CreativeWork", "name": "The Effect of Teacher's Questioning Behaviour on EFL Classroom Interaction", "author": "Nematullah Shomoossi", "datePublished": "1997", "url": "https://files.eric.ed.gov/fulltext/ED500840.pdf" },
        { "@type": "Book", "name": "Learning Teaching", "author": "Jim Scrivener", "datePublished": "2011", "publisher": "Macmillan" },
        { "@type": "Book", "name": "How to Teach Grammar", "author": "Scott Thornbury", "datePublished": "1999", "publisher": "Longman" },
        { "@type": "Book", "name": "A Course in English Language Teaching", "author": "Penny Ur", "datePublished": "2012", "publisher": "Cambridge University Press" }
      ]
    },
    {
      "@type": "FAQPage",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/#faq",
      "mainEntity": [
        { "@type": "Question", "name": "What is a concept checking question?", "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "A concept checking question is a short question a teacher asks to confirm that learners have understood the meaning of a new word, phrase or structure, rather than asking them directly whether they understand. It uses simpler language than the target item, does not contain the target item, and expects a brief answer such as yes, no, or a single word." } },
        { "@type": "Question", "name": "How many concept checking questions should a teacher ask?", "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "Two or three for each item is the working rule. A single yes or no question can be answered correctly by guessing, so it is weak evidence on its own, while a long run of questions turns clarification into interrogation and eats the practice time the check was meant to protect." } },
        { "@type": "Question", "name": "What makes a bad concept checking question?", "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "Four faults account for most of them: the question contains the target language, so a learner can answer by recognition; the question uses harder words than the item being checked; the question carries two ideas at once, so a wrong answer does not say which idea failed; or the question supplies its own answer through a tag or an intonation pattern." } },
        { "@type": "Question", "name": "What is the difference between a CCQ and an ICQ?", "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "A concept checking question checks that learners understand what a piece of language means. An instruction checking question checks that they understand what they have been asked to do in an activity, such as who they are working with or how long they have. CCQs come before practice; ICQs come before a task." } },
        { "@type": "Question", "name": "When in a lesson should concept checking questions be asked?", "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "Directly after the meaning of the new language has been presented in a context and before learners move into controlled practice. That is the window in which a misunderstanding is cheap to repair. Once a class has drilled or produced a form it has misread, the teacher is no longer correcting a concept but unpicking a habit." } },
        { "@type": "Question", "name": "Can concept checking questions be used with beginners?", "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "Yes, and they matter more at low levels, because a beginner has fewer ways to signal confusion. The constraint is that the question must be answerable with the English the class already has, so at beginner level checks lean on yes or no answers, either or choices, pictures, real objects and gesture rather than on wording alone." } }
      ]
    },
    {
      "@type": "BreadcrumbList",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/#glossary-breadcrumb",
      "itemListElement": [
        { "@type": "ListItem", "position": 1, "name": "tefl.ai", "item": "https://tefl.ai/" },
        { "@type": "ListItem", "position": 2, "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary", "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/" },
        { "@type": "ListItem", "position": 3, "name": "Concept Checking Questions (CCQs)", "item": "https://tefl.ai/concept-checking-questions/" }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Drilling</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/drilling/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 28 Sep 2026 18:04:20 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pronunciation teaching]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[vocabulary drills]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3147</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Drilling is controlled repetition of a target word, phrase or structure, led by the teacher, to build accuracy and automaticity in production. The teacher gives a model, learners repeat it chorally and then individually, and variations substitute one element at a time. Drilling shapes pronunciation and form; it does not by itself produce communication.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-size: 20px; line-height: 1.6; font-weight: 600; color: #0f2233; margin: 0 0 24px; padding: 20px 22px; border-left: 5px solid #00E3C4; background: #f6fdfc;">Drilling is controlled repetition of a target word, phrase or structure, led by the teacher, to build accuracy and automaticity in production. The teacher gives a model, learners repeat it chorally and then individually, and variations substitute one element at a time. Drilling shapes pronunciation and form; it does not by itself produce communication.</p>
<div style="margin: 0 0 30px; padding: 24px 26px; background: #0F2233; border-radius: 12px; color: #e8f3f4;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 6px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .1em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<ul style="margin: 0 0 14px; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.7;">
<li>Drilling is a <strong style="color: #00e3c4;">technique</strong>, not a method. It can sit inside almost any approach.</li>
<li>Its job is accuracy and automaticity, mainly of <strong style="color: #00e3c4;">pronunciation and fixed chunks</strong>.</li>
<li>Meaning comes first. Repeating language the class does not understand teaches nothing.</li>
<li>Drill the hard part, not the whole sentence, then move the language straight into a task where meaning matters.</li>
</ul>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: 15px;"><a style="color: #9cf3e4;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Part of the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a></p>
</div>
<h2>How drilling is used in practice</h2>
<p>A drill has three moving parts: a model, a prompt and a response. The teacher supplies the model, gives a signal or a cue, and the learners produce the response. Because the response is fixed, or nearly fixed, the learner has almost no choice about what to say. That is the defining feature. The British Council puts it plainly in its guidance on the technique: in all drills learners have no or very little choice over what is said, so drills are a form of very controlled practice, there is one correct answer, and the focus is on getting it right.</p>
<p>That constraint is the point. It frees attention. A learner who is not deciding what to say can spend the whole of their attention on how to say it, which is exactly what a difficult consonant cluster or an unfamiliar stress pattern demands. It is also the technique&#8217;s limit, and the reason a lesson made only of drills produces learners who can perform sentences and not hold conversations.</p>
<h3>The main types of drill</h3>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0 8px; font-size: 15px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Type</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What happens</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What it is good for</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Repetition drill</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The teacher models a word or phrase and the learners say it back unchanged.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">First contact with a new sound, chunk or stress pattern.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Choral drill</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The whole class responds together.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Volume of practice, and cover for learners who are not yet confident enough to be heard alone.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Individual drill</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">One nominated learner responds.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Diagnosis. It is the only version in which the teacher can actually hear who has it.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Substitution drill</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The teacher changes one cue each time and the learners adjust the response. Prompt: <em>I go to work. He?</em> Response: <em>He goes to work.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Making a pattern flexible rather than memorised as a single lump.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Question and answer drill</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The prompt is a question and the response is the answer, practising a common pair such as <em>Can I have a pen please?</em> and <em>Yes, here you are.</em></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Adjacency pairs, and the rhythm of a short exchange rather than a single line.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Back chaining</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The teacher builds the phrase from the end: <em>yesterday</em>, then <em>get up yesterday</em>, then <em>did you get up yesterday</em>, then the whole question.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Long phrases whose intonation collapses when built from the front.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75; margin: 0 0 26px;">The substitution and question and answer examples above are the British Council&#8217;s own, taken from its <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/knowing-subject/drilling-1" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Drilling 1</a> article and its <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/drill" target="_blank" rel="noopener">teaching knowledge database entry for drill</a>.</p>
<h3>What is worth drilling, and what is not</h3>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0 8px; font-size: 15px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Worth drilling</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Why</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Example</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Sounds absent from the learners&#8217; first language</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The mouth has never made the shape before and needs physical practice, not explanation.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The two <em>th</em> sounds in <em>think</em> and <em>this</em>.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Consonant clusters</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Many languages break clusters with an extra vowel, and the habit survives long after the grammar is secure.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>Strengths</em>, <em>asked</em>, <em>clothes</em>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Weak forms and linking</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Learners who have only met the written form say every word in full and sound laboured.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>A cup of tea</em>, where <em>of</em> almost disappears.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Word and sentence stress</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Stress carries more of the listener&#8217;s understanding than individual sounds do.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>Comfortable</em> and <em>vegetable</em>, both shorter than they look.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Intonation that changes meaning</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The same words mean different things depending on the contour, and this cannot be taught on paper.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">A tag question asking for confirmation against one that is a genuine question.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">High frequency chunks</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Fixed expressions are stored and retrieved whole, so automaticity is worth buying.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><em>If I were you, I would</em>, <em>Have you got a</em>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>The other half of that list matters as much. The British Council&#8217;s guidance is explicit that drilling structures for their own sake is much less likely to be useful, because applying a grammar rule accurately takes mental processing that repetition does not supply, particularly when the language is new. A class can chant the third conditional faultlessly and still fail to produce it when they need it, and every experienced teacher has watched exactly that happen.</p>
<h2>A worked classroom example</h2>
<p>An A2 class of eighteen adults in a general English course. The target is a single functional phrase they will need from their first week in an English speaking workplace: <em>Could you say that again, please?</em> The difficulty is not the words. It is that <em>could you</em> runs together into something closer to one syllable, and that the phrase needs a polite rising contour rather than the flat delivery learners default to when reading.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0 8px; font-size: 15px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233; width: 8%;">Move</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233; width: 46%;">What the teacher does</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233; width: 46%;">Why this move and not another</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>1</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Sets a situation before saying the phrase at all. She mimes a bad phone line, says something deliberately inaudible, and lets the class see the problem.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Meaning has to come before repetition. The British Council&#8217;s phrasing is that monotonous chanting of decontextualised language is not useful to anyone, and a class that does not know why it is saying something will say it badly.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>2</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Models the phrase twice at natural speed, with nothing written on the board.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The written form is the enemy here. Learners who see <em>could you</em> will say two full words. Withholding the text for ninety seconds is the single cheapest way to protect the pronunciation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>3</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Back chains it: <em>please</em>, then <em>again please</em>, then <em>say that again please</em>, then the whole question, choral each time.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Built from the front, the phrase runs out of energy and the ending goes flat. Built from the end, the contour is right from the first repetition and never has to be corrected.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>4</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Choral, then half the room, then three nominated individuals. Total elapsed time under two minutes.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Choral repetition builds volume and hides the nervous. Individual repetition is the only part that tells the teacher anything, so it has to happen, and it has to be brief enough that nobody is on display for long.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>5</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Moves straight into a pair dictation in which the speaker is told to mumble on purpose, so the listener has a genuine reason to use the phrase.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">This is the move most often skipped, and skipping it is what makes drilling look useless. Without a task that needs the phrase, it remains a noise the class can make on command and nowhere else.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Two things carry the example. The first is that the drill lasted under two minutes. The British Council&#8217;s advice is to keep drilling snappy and to stop before boredom sets in, on the grounds that a bored drill is unlikely to be useful at all. The second is move five. A drill with no transfer stage is the version of the technique that gave drilling its poor reputation, and the fix costs one activity.</p>
<h2>Commonly confused</h2>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 18px 0 8px; font-size: 15px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Pair</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">The distinction that matters</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Drilling vs eliciting</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">They run in opposite directions. In <a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#eliciting">eliciting</a> the teacher gives a prompt and the learners supply the language. In drilling the teacher supplies the language and the learners supply the repetition. A lesson often does both in sequence: elicit the phrase, then drill it.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Drilling vs repetition</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">All drilling is repetition; not all repetition is drilling. Drilling is repetition organised around a teacher model and a deliberate target. A learner rereading a text aloud is repeating, but nobody is shaping what comes out.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Drilling vs controlled practice</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Drilling is one kind of controlled practice, the oral and immediate kind. A gap fill exercise is also controlled practice and is not a drill. The distinction is useful when a lesson plan says <em>controlled practice</em> and the trainee assumes it means twenty minutes of chanting.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Drilling vs the audiolingual method</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">A technique against a whole method. Audiolingualism was built almost entirely out of drills and has been largely abandoned; drilling survived the method that overused it, in the way that a tool outlives a fashion for using only that tool.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Drilling vs back chaining</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Back chaining is not a rival to drilling, it is a way of doing one. Trainees sometimes list them as alternatives on a lesson plan, which signals that the plan has not been thought through.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;"><strong>Drilling vs choral reading</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Choral reading works from a written text in front of the learners, so it practises decoding as much as pronunciation. A choral drill usually works from the teacher&#8217;s voice with the text hidden, which is why it produces different, and for pronunciation purposes better, results.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Where drilling came from, and why it fell out of favour</h2>
<p>Drilling as a systematic classroom procedure belongs to the audiolingual method, which grew out of intensive wartime language programmes in the United States and was codified at the University of Michigan by Charles Fries and his colleagues in the years after 1945. Its two supports were structural linguistics, which treated a language as an inventory of patterns, and behaviourist psychology, which treated language learning as habit formation through stimulus, response and reinforcement. If a language was a set of habits, then drilling those habits to the point of automatic production was not one technique among many. It was the whole curriculum.</p>
<p>The theoretical support gave way first. Noam Chomsky&#8217;s 1959 review of B. F. Skinner&#8217;s <em>Verbal Behavior</em> argued that habit formation could not account for the fact that speakers routinely produce and understand sentences they have never heard, and the field moved on. The British Council&#8217;s own summary of the position is blunt: the behaviourist view held that repeating phrases correctly enough times would lead to mastery, we now know language learning is not like this, and an approach based mainly or only on language drills is unlikely to find many adherents today.</p>
<p>What did not follow, and what the more careless version of this history gets wrong, is that drilling itself was disproved. The method was abandoned. The technique was demoted. The British Council&#8217;s same guidance goes on to say that drilling remains a useful technique in the classroom if it is used appropriately, and in practice it never left: teachers who would describe their approach as communicative still drill a difficult phrase before a role play, because it works for that job.</p>
<h3>What the research actually supports</h3>
<p>The honest position is that the evidence for repetition is strongest where drilling&#8217;s defenders now place it, on pronunciation and on the automaticity of fixed forms, and weakest where audiolingualism placed it, on grammatical competence. A study by Jung, Kim and Murphy in <em>Studies in Second Language Acquisition</em> in 2017 tested this with fifty seven Korean high school learners across three groups over four weeks, measuring the production of English word stress patterns. Both repetition conditions improved accuracy, and for longer term retention repeating the same task with the same content twice beat repeating the procedure with different content. That is a narrow finding about lexical stress and priming tasks rather than a general endorsement of drills, and it should be read as such, but it points the same way as classroom experience: repeated production of the same target does shape how learners say things.</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 26px;">The claim that drilling builds the ability to communicate has no comparable support, and the page makes no such claim. Pronunciation notation is a useful companion here, and the Group&#8217;s global reference on it sits on <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/blog/what-is-the-ipa-the-phonetic-alphabet-for-english-teachers/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">the International Phonetic Alphabet for English teachers</a>. For activity level treatment of the same ground in a European classroom, see <a href="https://tefl.ie/tefl-pronunciation-activities/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL.ie&#8217;s pronunciation activities for European English teachers</a>.</p>
<h2>References</h2>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #5c6b75; margin: 0 0 12px;">Four of the sources below were fetched and confirmed reachable on 23 September 2026 and carry links. The remainder are standard published works cited bibliographically, without links, because no stable open source for them was verified.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 0 0 26px; font-size: 15px;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Source</th>
<th style="padding: 10px 12px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What it supports here</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">British Council TeachingEnglish, <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/knowing-subject/drilling-1" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Drilling 1</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The definition of controlled practice, the behaviourist origin, what to drill and when, and the warning about decontextualised chanting.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">British Council TeachingEnglish, <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/knowing-subject/drilling-2" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Drilling 2</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Back chaining, varying who repeats, keeping the pace snappy, and the closing rule to drill only language that benefits from it.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">British Council TeachingEnglish, <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/drill" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Teaching knowledge database: drill</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Choral and substitution drills, the worked substitution sequence, and the standard objection that drilling is teacher centred.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Jung, Y., Kim, Y. and Murphy, J. (2017), <a href="https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1152577" target="_blank" rel="noopener">The Role of Task Repetition in Learning Word-Stress Patterns through Auditory Priming Tasks</a>, <em>Studies in Second Language Acquisition</em>, 39(2), 319 to 346</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The measured effect of task repetition on the production of English word stress, and the advantage of repeating content rather than only procedure.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Richards, J. C. and Schmidt, R. (2010), <em>Longman Dictionary of Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics</em>, 4th edition</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The standard reference definitions of drill, substitution drill and pattern practice.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Fries, C. C. (1945), <em>Teaching and Learning English as a Foreign Language</em>, University of Michigan Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The structural basis of pattern practice and the Michigan codification of the approach.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Skinner, B. F. (1957), <em>Verbal Behavior</em>; and Chomsky, N. (1959), review of <em>Verbal Behavior</em>, <em>Language</em>, 35(1), 26 to 58</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The behaviourist account of language as habit, and the critique that removed its theoretical support.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f7fafa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Scrivener, J. (2011), <em>Learning Teaching</em>, 3rd edition; Harmer, J. (2015), <em>The Practice of English Language Teaching</em>, 5th edition</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Standard teacher training treatment of drilling stages, nomination and correction.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">Thornbury, S. (2006), <em>An A to Z of ELT</em>; Lightbown, P. M. and Spada, N. (2021), <em>How Languages are Learned</em>, 5th edition</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf;">The place of drilling in current terminology, and the wider evidence on practice and second language acquisition.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<div style="margin: 0 0 30px; padding: 22px 24px; border: 1px solid #00E3C4; border-left: 6px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 10px; background: #f6fdfc;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 6px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .1em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #0f7f6f;">In the classroom</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.75; color: #0f2233;">
<li><strong>Drill the hard part, not the whole sentence.</strong> Isolate the cluster, the weak form or the stress, fix that, then put it back.</li>
<li><strong>Keep the text hidden on the first pass.</strong> English spelling will undo the model if learners see it too early.</li>
<li><strong>Choral first, individual second, and stop early.</strong> Individual repetition is the diagnostic step, and it is also the exposing one.</li>
<li><strong>Always have the next task ready.</strong> A drill with nowhere to go is the version everybody remembers and nobody defends.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>What is drilling in teaching English?</h3>
<p>Drilling is controlled repetition of a target word, phrase or structure, led by the teacher, to build accuracy and automaticity in production. The teacher gives a model, learners repeat it chorally and then individually, and variations substitute one element at a time. It is a classroom technique rather than a method, and it can be used within almost any approach to teaching.</p>
<h3>What are the main types of drill?</h3>
<p>The common types are repetition drills, in which learners say back an unchanged model; choral drills, in which the whole class responds together; individual drills, in which one nominated learner responds; substitution drills, in which the teacher changes one cue each time; and question and answer drills, which practise a short exchange rather than a single line. Back chaining, building a phrase from its final word backwards, is a way of running any of these rather than a separate type.</p>
<h3>Is drilling still used in modern language teaching?</h3>
<p>Yes, though in a much smaller role than it had under the audiolingual method. The British Council&#8217;s position is that an approach based mainly or only on drills is unlikely to find many adherents today, but that drilling remains a useful technique when used appropriately. In practice most communicative classrooms still drill, usually briefly and usually for pronunciation, before learners use the language in a freer task.</p>
<h3>What should teachers drill, and what should they not drill?</h3>
<p>Drill what causes trouble in the mouth: sounds absent from the learners&#8217; first language, consonant clusters, weak forms and linking, word and sentence stress, meaningful intonation patterns, and high frequency fixed chunks. Drilling grammatical structures for their own sake is much less productive, because applying a rule accurately requires mental processing that repetition does not provide, particularly when the language is new to the class.</p>
<h3>How long should a drilling stage last?</h3>
<p>There is no established figure, and any source offering one is guessing. The usable guidance is qualitative: keep the pace snappy, vary who repeats, and stop before the class loses interest, because a drill that has become boring is unlikely to be doing any good. In most lessons this means a stage measured in a small number of minutes rather than a block of the lesson.</p>
<h3>What is the difference between drilling and eliciting?</h3>
<p>The two techniques move in opposite directions. In eliciting the teacher supplies a prompt and the learners supply the language, which reveals what the class already knows. In drilling the teacher supplies the language and the learners supply the repetition, which shapes how accurately they can produce it. They are complementary rather than alternative, and a well built presentation stage often elicits a phrase first and then drills it.</p>
<h2>Related entries in this glossary</h2>
<p>Drilling sits inside the practice stage of a lesson, so it is best read alongside <a href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">presentation, practice, production</a>, which is the framework that gives the drill its place in a lesson shape. It is also teacher fronted by design, which makes it a recurring item in any discussion of <a href="https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/">teacher talking time versus student talking time</a>, where the useful question is not how much the teacher speaks but what the speaking is doing. The comfort of choral repetition, and why exposed individual repetition can backfire, is covered in the entry on <a href="https://tefl.ai/affective-filter/">the affective filter</a>. The full set of twenty terms is in <a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</p>
<div style="margin: 30px 0 18px; padding: 20px 22px; background: #f2f6f7; border-radius: 10px; font-size: 14px; color: #33454f;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-weight: bold; color: #0f2233;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0;">tefl.ai (2026) <em>Drilling</em>. TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary. Published 23 September 2026. Available at: https://tefl.ai/drilling/</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 13px; color: #6b7c88; margin: 0 0 8px;">Last updated 23 September 2026. Written by Katie Troy for tefl.ai. External sources were checked and confirmed reachable on 23 September 2026.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">
{
  "@context": "https://schema.org",
  "@graph": [
    {
      "@type": "DefinedTerm",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/#definedterm",
      "name": "Drilling",
      "alternateName": ["Repetition drill", "Choral drill", "Substitution drill", "Language drill"],
      "description": "Drilling is controlled repetition of a target word, phrase or structure, led by the teacher, to build accuracy and automaticity in production. The teacher gives a model, learners repeat it chorally and then individually, and variations substitute one element at a time. Drilling shapes pronunciation and form; it does not by itself produce communication.",
      "inDefinedTermSet": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary" },
      "sameAs": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#drilling",
      "url": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/",
      "termCode": "drilling"
    },
    {
      "@type": "Article",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/#article",
      "headline": "Drilling",
      "description": "What drilling is in English language teaching, the main types of drill, a worked classroom example, what is worth drilling, and how drilling differs from eliciting and controlled practice.",
      "mainEntityOfPage": { "@type": "WebPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/" },
      "about": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/#definedterm" },
      "isPartOf": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary" },
      "inLanguage": "en-GB",
      "datePublished": "2026-09-23",
      "dateModified": "2026-09-23",
      "author": { "@type": "Person", "name": "Katie Troy" },
      "publisher": { "@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization" },
      "image": "https://tefl.ai/wp-content/uploads/2026/09/drilling-choral-repetition-english-class.jpg",
      "citation": [
        "British Council TeachingEnglish, Drilling 1, https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/knowing-subject/drilling-1",
        "British Council TeachingEnglish, Drilling 2, https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/knowing-subject/drilling-2",
        "British Council TeachingEnglish, Teaching knowledge database: drill, https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/drill",
        "Jung, Y., Kim, Y. and Murphy, J. (2017) The Role of Task Repetition in Learning Word-Stress Patterns through Auditory Priming Tasks, Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 39(2), 319 to 346, https://eric.ed.gov/?id=EJ1152577",
        "Richards, J. C. and Schmidt, R. (2010) Longman Dictionary of Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics, 4th edition",
        "Fries, C. C. (1945) Teaching and Learning English as a Foreign Language, University of Michigan Press",
        "Skinner, B. F. (1957) Verbal Behavior",
        "Chomsky, N. (1959) Review of Verbal Behavior, Language, 35(1), 26 to 58",
        "Scrivener, J. (2011) Learning Teaching, 3rd edition",
        "Harmer, J. (2015) The Practice of English Language Teaching, 5th edition",
        "Thornbury, S. (2006) An A to Z of ELT",
        "Lightbown, P. M. and Spada, N. (2021) How Languages are Learned, 5th edition"
      ]
    },
    {
      "@type": "FAQPage",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/#faq",
      "mainEntity": [
        {
          "@type": "Question",
          "name": "What is drilling in teaching English?",
          "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "Drilling is controlled repetition of a target word, phrase or structure, led by the teacher, to build accuracy and automaticity in production. The teacher gives a model, learners repeat it chorally and then individually, and variations substitute one element at a time. It is a classroom technique rather than a method, and it can be used within almost any approach to teaching." }
        },
        {
          "@type": "Question",
          "name": "What are the main types of drill?",
          "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "The common types are repetition drills, in which learners say back an unchanged model; choral drills, in which the whole class responds together; individual drills, in which one nominated learner responds; substitution drills, in which the teacher changes one cue each time; and question and answer drills, which practise a short exchange rather than a single line. Back chaining, building a phrase from its final word backwards, is a way of running any of these rather than a separate type." }
        },
        {
          "@type": "Question",
          "name": "Is drilling still used in modern language teaching?",
          "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "Yes, though in a much smaller role than it had under the audiolingual method. The British Council's position is that an approach based mainly or only on drills is unlikely to find many adherents today, but that drilling remains a useful technique when used appropriately. In practice most communicative classrooms still drill, usually briefly and usually for pronunciation, before learners use the language in a freer task." }
        },
        {
          "@type": "Question",
          "name": "What should teachers drill, and what should they not drill?",
          "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "Drill what causes trouble in the mouth: sounds absent from the learners' first language, consonant clusters, weak forms and linking, word and sentence stress, meaningful intonation patterns, and high frequency fixed chunks. Drilling grammatical structures for their own sake is much less productive, because applying a rule accurately requires mental processing that repetition does not provide, particularly when the language is new to the class." }
        },
        {
          "@type": "Question",
          "name": "How long should a drilling stage last?",
          "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "There is no established figure, and any source offering one is guessing. The usable guidance is qualitative: keep the pace snappy, vary who repeats, and stop before the class loses interest, because a drill that has become boring is unlikely to be doing any good. In most lessons this means a stage measured in a small number of minutes rather than a block of the lesson." }
        },
        {
          "@type": "Question",
          "name": "What is the difference between drilling and eliciting?",
          "acceptedAnswer": { "@type": "Answer", "text": "The two techniques move in opposite directions. In eliciting the teacher supplies a prompt and the learners supply the language, which reveals what the class already knows. In drilling the teacher supplies the language and the learners supply the repetition, which shapes how accurately they can produce it. They are complementary rather than alternative, and a well built presentation stage often elicits a phrase first and then drills it." }
        }
      ]
    },
    {
      "@type": "BreadcrumbList",
      "@id": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/#glossary-breadcrumb",
      "itemListElement": [
        { "@type": "ListItem", "position": 1, "name": "tefl.ai", "item": "https://tefl.ai/" },
        { "@type": "ListItem", "position": 2, "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary", "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/" },
        { "@type": "ListItem", "position": 3, "name": "Drilling", "item": "https://tefl.ai/drilling/" }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>L1 Interference</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 28 Sep 2026 18:04:00 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Error Correction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pronunciation teaching]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3152</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[L1 interference is the effect a learner's first language has on their English when the two languages differ, producing errors that follow the rules of the first language rather than the target one. It is one form of language transfer, and it shows most clearly in pronunciation, word order and word choice.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-size: 1.18em; line-height: 1.65;"><strong>L1 interference is the effect a learner&#8217;s first language has on their English when the two languages differ, producing errors that follow the rules of the first language rather than the target one. It is one form of language transfer, and it shows most clearly in pronunciation, word order and word choice.</strong></p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 28px 0; border-radius: 6px;">
<p style="color: #9cf3e4; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: .09em; font-size: .76em; margin: 0 0 10px; font-weight: bold;">The short version</p>
<p style="color: #ffffff; margin: 0 0 12px;">A Spanish speaker writing &#8220;I have 20 years&#8221; is not guessing. They are applying a rule that works perfectly in Spanish. The error is systematic, predictable from the language pair, and therefore teachable in advance rather than only correctable after the fact.</p>
<p style="color: #ffffff; margin: 0 0 12px;">Interference is the negative half of a larger phenomenon. Where the two languages agree, the first language helps, and that is positive transfer. Teachers only notice the half that produces errors.</p>
<p style="margin: 0;"><a style="color: #00e3c4; font-weight: 600;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Back to the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a></p>
</div>
<h2>What L1 interference actually means</h2>
<p>Every learner arrives with a complete language already installed. When they meet a new one, they do what any efficient mind does: they look for correspondences and apply what they already know. Most of the time this is invisible and helpful. A Portuguese speaker meeting the English word <em>possible</em> has very little work to do. A Japanese speaker meeting it has a great deal more.</p>
<p>L1 interference is what happens at the points where the correspondence fails. The learner applies a first language rule in a place English does not accept it, and an error appears. The British Council&#8217;s teaching knowledge database defines it as the case &#8220;where a speaker uses language forms and structures from their first language in language they are learning&#8221;, and notes that it is &#8220;an area many teachers are concerned with&#8221;.</p>
<p>Three features make it different from ordinary error. It is <strong>systematic</strong>, so the same learner makes it repeatedly rather than at random. It is <strong>predictable</strong>, because it follows from the structure of the language pair and can be anticipated before a single lesson is taught. And it is <strong>shared</strong>, so in a class where everyone has the same first language, everyone makes it at once.</p>
<h3>Where it shows up</h3>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 22px 0;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Level of language</th>
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What transfers</th>
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">How it sounds in class</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Phonology</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The sound inventory and the syllable shape of the first language</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Two English sounds collapse into one, or a vowel is inserted to break a consonant cluster</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Syntax</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Word order, article use, question formation, negation</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Articles added or dropped, adjectives after the noun, the auxiliary left out of a question</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Lexis</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Cognates, collocation, the range of a word&#8217;s meaning</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">False friends, and verbs that collocate in the first language but not in English</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Morphology</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">How tense, number and gender are marked</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">A tense used with the distribution it has in the first language rather than in English</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Pragmatics</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Politeness, directness, how a request is softened</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">A request that is grammatically perfect and reads as blunt or as overly formal</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Discourse</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">How a paragraph or an argument is organised</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">An essay that builds to its point where an English reader expects it first</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>The last two rows are the ones trainee teachers miss. Interference is usually taught as a grammar problem, and the errors that damage communication most are often the pragmatic and discourse ones, because the learner sounds fluent and rude rather than obviously wrong.</p>
<h2>A worked classroom example</h2>
<p>A B1 class of eleven teenagers in a Greek frontistirio, all with Greek as their first language, preparing for a Cambridge exam. The teacher sets a short written task and collects it. Three patterns come back across almost every script.</p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 22px 0;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What the class wrote</th>
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Why the first language produced it</th>
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What the teacher decided</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">&#8220;I like very much the music.&#8221;</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Greek uses the definite article with a generic or abstract noun, and places the adverb before the object more freely than English allows</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Teach it.</strong> Shared by the whole class, stable, and it will not clear up on its own</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">&#8220;Yesterday I have gone to the cinema.&#8221;</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The Greek perfect does not carve up past time the way the English present perfect does, so the two forms are mapped onto one</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Teach it, slowly.</strong> This is a system difference, not a rule the learner has forgotten</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">&#8220;sheep&#8221; and &#8220;ship&#8221; spoken identically</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Greek has a single high front vowel where English has a contrasting pair</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Treat by consequence.</strong> Worth minimal pair work because it can change the meaning of a sentence</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>The teaching move that matters is the third column, and it is a decision procedure rather than a correction. The teacher asks three questions of every interference pattern.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Does it stop the listener understanding?</strong> If it does, it is a priority whatever else is true of it. If it does not, it joins a queue.</li>
<li><strong>Is it shared by the class or personal to one learner?</strong> A shared pattern is worth ten minutes of board time. A personal one belongs in that learner&#8217;s feedback and nowhere else.</li>
<li><strong>Is it a system difference or a slip?</strong> A slip is corrected in passing. A system difference needs its own lesson, because the learner is not failing to apply an English rule, they are applying a different one correctly.</li>
</ol>
<p>Applied to this class, the article and adverb pattern is taught on Tuesday with a contrastive board stage, the present perfect is booked for its own lesson in a fortnight, and the vowel pair gets two minutes of drilling at the start of each class for a week. Nothing else on the scripts is touched. That restraint is the point. A teacher who red-pens every interference error in a monolingual class produces demoralised learners and no measurable change, because the errors that remain are the ones that were never taught.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; padding: 22px 26px; margin: 28px 0; border-radius: 6px;">
<p style="color: #9cf3e4; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: .09em; font-size: .76em; margin: 0 0 10px; font-weight: bold;">Four things to do with interference in a monolingual class</p>
<ol style="color: #ffffff; margin: 0; padding-left: 20px;">
<li style="margin-bottom: 9px;"><strong style="color: #00e3c4;">Predict before you teach.</strong> Find out what your learners&#8217; first language does with articles, tense and word order before the course starts, and build the contrastive stages into the scheme of work rather than improvising them.</li>
<li style="margin-bottom: 9px;"><strong style="color: #00e3c4;">Make the comparison explicit.</strong> In a class that shares a first language, saying out loud how the two languages differ is faster than hoping the pattern is noticed. The British Council reports that learners &#8220;benefit from a teacher&#8217;s competence in a shared language&#8221;.</li>
<li style="margin-bottom: 9px;"><strong style="color: #00e3c4;">Use translation as a noticing task.</strong> Reverse translation, where learners translate a text out of English and another pair translates it back, surfaces structural differences and, in the British Council&#8217;s words, &#8220;can help to address interference errors&#8221;.</li>
<li style="margin: 0;"><strong style="color: #00e3c4;">Triage by consequence, not by irritation.</strong> The errors that most annoy a teacher are rarely the ones that most damage communication.</li>
</ol>
</div>
<h2>Commonly confused with L1 interference</h2>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 22px 0;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Term</th>
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">How it differs</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Language transfer</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Transfer is the whole phenomenon, the influence of one language on another in either direction. Interference is only the negative part of it, the part that produces error. Treating the two as synonyms hides the fact that most transfer helps.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong><a href="https://tefl.ai/interlanguage/">Interlanguage</a></strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Interlanguage is the learner&#8217;s whole developing system, with rules of its own. Interference is one of several sources feeding that system. An interlanguage form can come from the first language, from overgeneralising an English rule, or from the way the language was taught.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Developmental error</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">A developmental error appears in learners of every first language and often in children acquiring English as a first language too. &#8220;He goed&#8221; is developmental. If speakers of unrelated languages make the same error, the first language is not the cause.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Fossilisation</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Fossilisation is an outcome, not a source. An interference pattern that survives instruction and stops changing has fossilised. Many interference errors never fossilise, and some non-interference errors do.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>A slip</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">A slip is a one-off failure of performance that the learner can correct when it is pointed out. An interference error is a failure of competence: the learner cannot self-correct because the rule they are applying is not the English one.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;"><strong>Codeswitching and translanguaging</strong></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">These are deliberate and skilled uses of more than one language. Interference is unintended. Reading a learner&#8217;s codeswitching as interference misreads a competence as a deficit, and the British Council now advises treating learners&#8217; other languages as a resource rather than an obstacle.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Where the idea came from, and what has survived</h2>
<p>The term belongs to a specific moment in applied linguistics, and the history matters because the strong version of the idea was tested and failed.</p>
<p>Robert Lado&#8217;s <em>Linguistics Across Cultures</em> in 1957 set out the contrastive analysis hypothesis: compare two languages systematically, and the points of difference will predict where learners struggle. For a decade this was the field&#8217;s main tool, and the promise was total. Difficulty would be predictable in advance, and the syllabus could be built around the differences.</p>
<p>It did not hold. Pit Corder&#8217;s 1967 paper <em>The significance of learners&#8217; errors</em> reframed error as evidence of a developing system rather than as failure, and the research that followed found that contrastive analysis both over-predicted and under-predicted. Many differences between languages caused no difficulty at all. Many of the errors learners actually made were developmental, shared by learners of every background, and had nothing to do with the first language. Larry Selinker&#8217;s 1972 paper named the learner&#8217;s system <a href="https://tefl.ai/interlanguage/">interlanguage</a> and listed language transfer as only one of five processes shaping it.</p>
<p>What survived is the weaker and more useful claim, set out most carefully in Terence Odlin&#8217;s <em>Language Transfer</em> in 1989: the first language is a real and substantial influence on second language learning, it is one influence among several, and it works in both directions. Comparing two languages is good at explaining errors after they appear and unreliable at predicting them before. That is precisely how the concept should be used in a classroom, and it is why the decision procedure in the worked example above starts with observation of what learners actually produced rather than with a list of differences drawn up in advance.</p>
<h3>Two cautions worth carrying into the classroom</h3>
<p><strong>Interference is not a defect.</strong> An error that follows the first language is evidence of an intelligent learner applying a working system to new material. Framing it to a class as carelessness is both wrong and demotivating, and anxiety about error is one of the conditions that raises the <a href="https://tefl.ai/affective-filter/">affective filter</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Not every learner has one first language.</strong> The British Council&#8217;s guidance on multilingual practice deliberately uses &#8220;learners&#8217; other languages&#8221; instead of L1 or mother tongue, because many learners have no single dominant language. Its example is a learner who uses Mandarin at school, Malay and English with friends and Hokkien at home. For learners like that, the question is not what their L1 does, but which of their languages is shaping a given error. The concept still applies. The label is what needs loosening.</p>
<h2>How to find out what your learners&#8217; first language does</h2>
<p>This is a <a href="https://tefl.ai/needs-analysis/">needs analysis</a> question, and it is cheap to answer. Three routes, in order of effort.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Ask the class.</strong> In a monolingual group, learners can usually tell you how their language handles articles or word order once the question is put concretely. This also positions them as the experts on their own language, which the British Council explicitly recommends.</li>
<li><strong>Read a language-specific reference.</strong> Swan and Smith&#8217;s <em>Learner English</em> is the standard one, with a chapter per language group setting out the predictable difficulties.</li>
<li><strong>Collect and sort a set of scripts.</strong> One written task from the whole class, sorted into shared patterns and personal ones, is the most reliable evidence available and takes about forty minutes.</li>
</ul>
<h2>References and further reading</h2>
<p style="background: #f5f9fa; border-left: 3px solid #00E3C4; padding: 12px 16px; margin: 18px 0;"><em>Two of the sources below carry links, and both were fetched and confirmed live on 25 September 2026. The remaining seven are books and journal articles that are not freely available online, so they are cited in full without a link.</em></p>
<table style="width: 100%; border-collapse: collapse; margin: 22px 0;">
<thead>
<tr style="background: #0F2233; color: #ffffff;">
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">Source</th>
<th style="padding: 11px 13px; text-align: left; border: 1px solid #0F2233;">What it contributes</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">British Council, TeachingEnglish, <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/l1" target="_blank" rel="noopener">L1</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The working definition of L1 interference, and the observation that it is easier to identify and address in a monolingual class</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Sathe, S., British Council, TeachingEnglish, <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/multilingual-practices/multilingualism-benefits-using-learners" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Multilingualism: the benefits of using learners&#8217; (other) languages in the classroom</a></td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The modern corrective: why &#8220;L1&#8221; is too blunt a label, and the reverse translation task for addressing interference errors</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Lado, R. (1957) <em>Linguistics Across Cultures</em>. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The contrastive analysis hypothesis in its original and strongest form</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Corder, S. P. (1967) The significance of learners&#8217; errors. <em>International Review of Applied Linguistics</em> 5(4), 161 to 170</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Error reframed as evidence of a developing system rather than as failure</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Selinker, L. (1972) Interlanguage. <em>International Review of Applied Linguistics</em> 10(3), 209 to 231</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Language transfer placed as one of five processes shaping the learner&#8217;s system</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Odlin, T. (1989) <em>Language Transfer: cross-linguistic influence in language learning</em>. Cambridge University Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The standard survey, and the source of the weaker claim that survived contrastive analysis</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Swan, M. and Smith, B. (eds) (2001) <em>Learner English</em>, 2nd edition. Cambridge University Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">A chapter per language group on the difficulties predictable from each first language</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f5f9fa;">
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Ellis, R. (2008) <em>The Study of Second Language Acquisition</em>, 2nd edition. Oxford University Press</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The research record on where contrastive analysis over-predicted and under-predicted</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">Richards, J. C. and Schmidt, R. (2010) <em>Longman Dictionary of Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics</em>, 4th edition. Harlow: Pearson</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 13px; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6;">The reference definitions of interference, transfer and negative transfer</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>What is L1 interference in simple terms?</h3>
<p>It is what happens when a learner applies a rule from their first language to English and the rule does not fit. The learner is not being careless. They are using a system that works, in a place where it does not apply. The result is an error that is systematic and repeated rather than random.</p>
<h3>Is L1 interference the same as negative transfer?</h3>
<p>In practice the two terms are used interchangeably, and both name the same thing: first language influence that produces error. Negative transfer is the more precise of the pair, because it makes clear that there is also positive transfer, where the first language helps. Interference is the older and more common classroom term.</p>
<h3>What causes L1 interference?</h3>
<p>A structural difference between the two languages, met by a learner who does not yet know the English rule. Where the languages agree, the first language speeds learning up. Where they differ, and particularly where English makes a distinction the first language does not make at all, the learner defaults to what they know. Sound systems, article systems and tense distributions are the most common sites.</p>
<h3>Should teachers correct every L1 interference error?</h3>
<p>No. Correcting everything produces demoralised learners and very little change. Triage by three questions: does it obstruct understanding, is it shared by the class or personal to one learner, and is it a slip or a system difference. Shared system differences that obstruct understanding earn a lesson. Everything else waits or goes into individual feedback.</p>
<h3>Can L1 interference be positive?</h3>
<p>Interference is by definition the negative case, but the wider phenomenon it belongs to is not. Positive transfer is doing quiet work in every lesson: shared vocabulary, shared word order, shared script. A learner whose first language is closely related to English starts several thousand words ahead. Teachers notice transfer only when it fails, which makes the first language look like a purely negative influence when most of its effect is helpful.</p>
<h3>How can teachers reduce L1 interference in a monolingual class?</h3>
<p>Use the shared language rather than banning it. Make the difference between the two languages explicit at the board, use translation tasks that force learners to notice structural differences, and build the predictable problem areas into the scheme of work rather than reacting to them. A monolingual class is the easiest setting in which to address interference, because every learner has the same problem at the same time.</p>
<h2>Related glossary entries</h2>
<ul>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/interlanguage/">Interlanguage</a>, the learner&#8217;s whole developing system, of which transfer is one input</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/needs-analysis/">Needs analysis</a>, the stage at which a teacher finds out what their learners&#8217; first language is and what it does</li>
<li><a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">The full TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a></li>
</ul>
<p>For the qualification and terminology side of teaching English, including what TEFL, TESOL, ESL and EFL each mean, see <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">The TEFL Institute&#8217;s qualifications and terminology guide</a>, and its overview of <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/blog/language-acquisition-insights-for-tefl-teachers/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">language acquisition for TEFL teachers</a>. For a picture of what a single first language classroom looks like in practice, The TEFL Institute of Ireland&#8217;s guide to <a href="https://tefl.ie/english-teaching-jobs-in-greece/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">English teaching jobs in Greece</a> describes the frontistirio system, where classes of Greek children prepare for Cambridge and IELTS exams together.</p>
<div style="background: #f5f9fa; border: 1px solid #d8e0e6; border-left: 4px solid #00E3C4; padding: 18px 22px; margin: 28px 0; border-radius: 6px;">
<p style="text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: .09em; font-size: .76em; margin: 0 0 9px; font-weight: bold; color: #0f2233;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: .95em;">tefl.ai (2026) &#8220;L1 interference&#8221;, <em>TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques: A Teacher&#8217;s Glossary</em>. Available at: https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/ (Accessed: 25 September 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: .88em; color: #54636e;"><em>Last updated: 25 September 2026. Written by Katie Troy for tefl.ai, part of The TEFL Institute Group.</em></p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">
{
"@context": "https://schema.org",
"@graph": [
{
"@type": "DefinedTerm",
"@id": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/#definedterm",
"name": "L1 interference",
"alternateName": ["First language interference", "Mother tongue interference", "Negative transfer", "L1 transfer"],
"description": "L1 interference is the effect a learner's first language has on their English when the two languages differ, producing errors that follow the rules of the first language rather than the target one. It is one form of language transfer, and it shows most clearly in pronunciation, word order and word choice.",
"url": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/",
"sameAs": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#l1-interference",
"inDefinedTermSet": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"}
},
{
"@type": "Article",
"@id": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/#article",
"headline": "L1 Interference",
"description": "What L1 interference is, how it differs from interlanguage and developmental error, a worked classroom example, and how teachers decide which interference errors to teach.",
"mainEntityOfPage": {"@type": "WebPage", "@id": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/"},
"about": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/#definedterm"},
"isPartOf": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"},
"inLanguage": "en-GB",
"datePublished": "2026-09-25",
"dateModified": "2026-09-25",
"author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Katie Troy"},
"publisher": {"@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"},
"citation": [
{"@type": "WebPage", "name": "L1", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "British Council"}, "url": "https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/l1"},
{"@type": "WebPage", "name": "Multilingualism: the benefits of using learners' (other) languages in the classroom", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Sangeeta Sathe"}, "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "British Council"}, "url": "https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/multilingual-practices/multilingualism-benefits-using-learners"},
{"@type": "Book", "name": "Linguistics Across Cultures", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Robert Lado"}, "datePublished": "1957", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "University of Michigan Press"}},
{"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "The significance of learners' errors", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "S. Pit Corder"}, "datePublished": "1967", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "International Review of Applied Linguistics"}},
{"@type": "ScholarlyArticle", "name": "Interlanguage", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Larry Selinker"}, "datePublished": "1972", "isPartOf": {"@type": "Periodical", "name": "International Review of Applied Linguistics"}},
{"@type": "Book", "name": "Language Transfer: cross-linguistic influence in language learning", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Terence Odlin"}, "datePublished": "1989", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Cambridge University Press"}},
{"@type": "Book", "name": "Learner English", "author": [{"@type": "Person", "name": "Michael Swan"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "Bernard Smith"}], "datePublished": "2001", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Cambridge University Press"}},
{"@type": "Book", "name": "The Study of Second Language Acquisition", "author": {"@type": "Person", "name": "Rod Ellis"}, "datePublished": "2008", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Oxford University Press"}},
{"@type": "Book", "name": "Longman Dictionary of Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics", "author": [{"@type": "Person", "name": "Jack C. Richards"}, {"@type": "Person", "name": "Richard Schmidt"}], "datePublished": "2010", "publisher": {"@type": "Organization", "name": "Pearson"}}
]
},
{
"@type": "FAQPage",
"@id": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/#faq",
"mainEntity": [
{"@type": "Question", "name": "What is L1 interference in simple terms?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "It is what happens when a learner applies a rule from their first language to English and the rule does not fit. The learner is not being careless. They are using a system that works, in a place where it does not apply. The result is an error that is systematic and repeated rather than random."}},
{"@type": "Question", "name": "Is L1 interference the same as negative transfer?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "In practice the two terms are used interchangeably, and both name the same thing: first language influence that produces error. Negative transfer is the more precise of the pair, because it makes clear that there is also positive transfer, where the first language helps. Interference is the older and more common classroom term."}},
{"@type": "Question", "name": "What causes L1 interference?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "A structural difference between the two languages, met by a learner who does not yet know the English rule. Where the languages agree, the first language speeds learning up. Where they differ, and particularly where English makes a distinction the first language does not make at all, the learner defaults to what they know. Sound systems, article systems and tense distributions are the most common sites."}},
{"@type": "Question", "name": "Should teachers correct every L1 interference error?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "No. Correcting everything produces demoralised learners and very little change. Triage by three questions: does it obstruct understanding, is it shared by the class or personal to one learner, and is it a slip or a system difference. Shared system differences that obstruct understanding earn a lesson. Everything else waits or goes into individual feedback."}},
{"@type": "Question", "name": "Can L1 interference be positive?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Interference is by definition the negative case, but the wider phenomenon it belongs to is not. Positive transfer is doing quiet work in every lesson: shared vocabulary, shared word order, shared script. A learner whose first language is closely related to English starts several thousand words ahead. Teachers notice transfer only when it fails, which makes the first language look like a purely negative influence when most of its effect is helpful."}},
{"@type": "Question", "name": "How can teachers reduce L1 interference in a monolingual class?", "acceptedAnswer": {"@type": "Answer", "text": "Use the shared language rather than banning it. Make the difference between the two languages explicit at the board, use translation tasks that force learners to notice structural differences, and build the predictable problem areas into the scheme of work rather than reacting to them. A monolingual class is the easiest setting in which to address interference, because every learner has the same problem at the same time."}}
]
},
{
"@type": "BreadcrumbList",
"@id": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/#glossary-breadcrumb",
"itemListElement": [
{"@type": "ListItem", "position": 1, "name": "tefl.ai", "item": "https://tefl.ai/"},
{"@type": "ListItem", "position": 2, "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary", "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"},
{"@type": "ListItem", "position": 3, "name": "L1 Interference", "item": "https://tefl.ai/l1-interference/"}
]
}
]
}
</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Backward Design</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/backward-design/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 28 Sep 2026 18:03:40 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Assessment]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ESL curriculum]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[lesson planning]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3156</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Backward design is a three stage planning sequence in which a teacher first sets the learning outcome, then decides what evidence would prove learners have reached it, and only then plans the lessons. Popularised by Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe, it replaces planning that begins with activities or with the next page of the coursebook.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="font-weight: 600; font-size: 19px; line-height: 1.6; color: #0f2233;">Backward design is a three stage planning sequence in which a teacher first sets the learning outcome, then decides what evidence would prove learners have reached it, and only then plans the lessons. Popularised by Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe, it replaces planning that begins with activities or with the next page of the coursebook.</p>
<div style="margin: 26px 0; padding: 24px 26px; border-radius: 12px; background: #0F2233; color: #e8f6f3;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 6px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .1em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 12px; font-size: 17px; line-height: 1.6;">Most planning runs forwards: pick a topic, pick some activities, teach them, then write a test at the end that fits whatever happened. Backward design runs the other way. You name the thing a learner should be able to do, you write down what would count as proof, and the lessons become whatever gets them there. Stage two is the one teachers skip, and skipping it is how a course fills up with good activities that nobody can show learners have learned from.</p>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: 14px;"><a style="color: #9cf3e4;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">Part of the TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</p>
</div>
<h2>The three stages</h2>
<p>The framework is set out by its authors in three stages, and the order is the whole point. Each stage answers a different question, and each one has to align with the others: what you named in stage one is what you assess in stage two and what you teach in stage three.</p>
<figure class="wp-block-table">
<table>
<thead>
<tr>
<th>Stage</th>
<th>The question it answers</th>
<th>What it produces in a language course</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1. Identify desired results</strong></td>
<td>What should learners know, understand and be able to do by the end? What is the transfer we actually want?</td>
<td>A small set of can do statements, usually two or three, written in the language of real performance rather than of grammar coverage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2. Determine acceptable evidence</strong></td>
<td>How will we know they got there? What would we accept as proof?</td>
<td>One performance task that looks like the real situation, plus lighter evidence such as a quiz, a recording or a marked piece of writing.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>3. Plan learning experiences and instruction</strong></td>
<td>What will equip them to perform well on that evidence?</td>
<td>The syllabus: the lexis, the structures, the skills work and the practice, chosen because the task needs them.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table><figcaption>Stages and key questions as set out by McTighe and Wiggins in the ASCD Understanding by Design framework white paper, 2012.</figcaption></figure>
<p>The authors describe the framework as guarding against two specific failures. One is treating the coursebook as the curriculum rather than as a resource. The other is activity oriented teaching, in which lessons are engaging but carry no clear priority or purpose. Both are recognisable in language teaching, and the second is the more comfortable of the two, because a class that is enjoying itself rarely complains.</p>
<h2>How it is used in practice</h2>
<p>In English language teaching the first stage is less exotic than it sounds, because the profession already has a shared vocabulary for outcomes. The Council of Europe built the CEFR around can do descriptors precisely so that a level could be stated as performance rather than as a list of structures, and those descriptors make a serviceable stage one when a course has no other stated goal. A stage one written as <em>learners can take and pass on a phone message containing a name, a date and a reason</em> is usable. A stage one written as <em>the present perfect</em> is not, because it names content rather than a result.</p>
<p>Stage two is where the method earns its keep, and it is the stage that separates backward design from ordinary good intentions. The question is not what test exists but what evidence would satisfy you. If the outcome is a phone message, the evidence is a phone message taken under something like real conditions, not a gap fill on reported speech. The British Council&#8217;s guidance on planning lessons and courses makes the same alignment point in simpler terms: <em>any activities you plan to do should directly link to that aim or learning outcome</em>, and each stage <em>builds on the stage before it until the learners eventually have all the skills and language they need to achieve the learning outcome</em>.</p>
<p>Stage three then becomes a shopping list rather than a creative act. You work back from the task and ask what it demands. That is usually a short, dull and surprisingly specific list, and it tends to be shorter than the one a coursebook unit would have given you.</p>
<h3>A worked classroom example</h3>
<p>A six week evening course for eleven adults at B1 in a language school in Seville, two hours a week, all of them working in customer facing roles in a call centre that has just added an English speaking line. The coursebook unit on the shelf covered travel and holidays.</p>
<figure class="wp-block-table">
<table>
<thead>
<tr>
<th>Stage</th>
<th>What was decided</th>
<th>Why</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1. Desired result</strong></td>
<td>By week six each learner can take a complaint call in English, establish what went wrong, state what will happen next and end the call politely.</td>
<td>It came out of a <a href="https://tefl.ai/needs-analysis/">needs analysis</a> in week one, not from the syllabus. Three learners said the part they dreaded was not vocabulary but not knowing how to close a call.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2. Evidence</strong></td>
<td>A recorded five minute role play in week six with the teacher as a difficult caller, marked against four criteria agreed with the group in week two. Plus two short recordings in weeks three and five, and a one page written follow up email.</td>
<td>The criteria were written before any lesson was planned. Agreeing them with the group in week two turned the assessment into a target rather than a surprise.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>3. Learning plan</strong></td>
<td>Polite interruption and clarification language, the softened future for commitments, complaint and apology lexis, numbers and spelling under pressure, telephone listening, and a weekly controlled practice slot.</td>
<td>Every item on the list is there because the task needs it. Travel and holidays came off the plan, and so did two grammar points that would otherwise have been taught out of habit.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table><figcaption>A worked six week application of backward design to a B1 workplace English course.</figcaption></figure>
<p>The instructive part is what the sequence removed. Planning forwards from the coursebook would have produced six competent lessons on travel, and the group would have finished the course no readier for the call they were afraid of. The removal is the method working, not a shortcut around it.</p>
<p>One caution from the same course: the week six recording was the only piece of evidence that carried real weight, and that is a known risk of the framework. A single culminating task is fragile, because one learner with a cold or a bad night loses the whole record. The two interim recordings existed to guard against that, and they are the part of the design most often left out.</p>
<h2>Commonly confused terms</h2>
<figure class="wp-block-table">
<table>
<thead>
<tr>
<th>Backward design is not</th>
<th>The difference</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Forward design</strong></td>
<td>Forward design starts from content or a syllabus and moves through method to outcomes. Backward design starts from outcomes. Jack Richards sets the two out, with central design as a third option that starts from classroom methodology, in his 2013 account of curriculum approaches in language teaching.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>A <a href="https://tefl.ai/needs-analysis/">needs analysis</a></strong></td>
<td>A needs analysis gathers information about learners before planning starts. Backward design is what you do with it. The needs analysis feeds stage one; it does not replace it, because a list of needs is not yet a statement of results.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Teaching to the test</strong></td>
<td>Teaching to the test starts from an existing exam and works back from its format. Backward design starts from what you actually want learners to be able to do and then designs evidence for it. If the exam happens to measure that, the two coincide. Often it does not, which is the subject of <a href="https://tefl.ai/washback/">washback</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><a href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">PPP</a> or any lesson shape</strong></td>
<td>PPP, task based learning and the rest describe the internal shape of a lesson. Backward design describes the order in which you plan, and it is neutral about what the lessons then look like. A backward designed course can be taught through PPP throughout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Writing a lesson aim</strong></td>
<td>Almost every lesson plan has an aim written at the top. Backward design is the harder second step of writing the evidence before the activities, and it is that step, not the aim, that changes what gets taught.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Constructive alignment</strong></td>
<td>John Biggs&#8217;s constructive alignment, from 1996 and in higher education, makes a very similar argument about matching objectives, assessment and teaching. The two are cousins rather than the same thing: backward design is a planning sequence, constructive alignment is a criterion you can apply to a course that already exists.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table><figcaption>Terms that sit close to backward design and are regularly treated as interchangeable with it.</figcaption></figure>
<h2>Where it comes from, and what it does not claim</h2>
<p>The idea that planning should start from ends rather than means is older than the name. Ralph Tyler set it out in 1949 in a four question rationale for curriculum planning that begins with the purposes a school seeks to attain. Wiggins and McTighe named it, gave it a template and made it usable at unit level in Understanding by Design, first published by ASCD in 1998 and revised in 2005.</p>
<p>Two parts of their framework are worth knowing and are often dropped in summaries. The first is the six facets of understanding, which is what stage two is supposed to assess against: the capacity to explain, interpret, apply, shift perspective, empathise and self assess. The authors are explicit that not all six are used every time, and that performance tasks built on them are culminating tasks for a unit rather than something a daily lesson carries. The second is that they do not recommend applying the full three stage process to an isolated lesson. The unit, not the lesson, is the design object, because an essential question is meant to be revisited over time rather than answered before the bell.</p>
<p>The honest caveat is about evidence. Backward design is very widely adopted and has a substantial practitioner literature behind it, including a peer reviewed account in CBE Life Sciences Education describing how graduate and secondary science teams used it to rebuild lesson plans under a National Science Foundation project. What it does not have is a body of controlled trials showing that courses planned this way outperform courses planned another way. It is best understood as a discipline for planning rather than as an intervention with a measured effect size, and a page that tells you otherwise is overselling it.</p>
<p>The second caveat is practical. The template can become the work. A three stage plan written for every unit of a general English course, complete with essential questions and transfer goals, is a large amount of paper for a teacher with four classes and no planning time. The part that survives contact with a real timetable is smaller: name the result, write the evidence, then plan. Everything else in the framework is optional scaffolding around those three moves.</p>
<h2>References</h2>
<p>Of the sources below, four were checked and are linked. The remaining five are books or journal articles that are not freely available online, so they are cited here without a link rather than left out.</p>
<figure class="wp-block-table">
<table>
<thead>
<tr>
<th>Source</th>
<th>What it supports</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>McTighe, J. and Wiggins, G. (2012) <em>Understanding by Design Framework</em>. ASCD white paper. <a href="https://files.ascd.org/staticfiles/ascd/pdf/siteASCD/publications/UbD_WhitePaper0312.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read it</a></td>
<td>The three stages, the seven tenets, the six facets of understanding, and the two failures the framework guards against.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Jones, K.A., Vermette, P.J. and Jones, J.L., in <em>CBE Life Sciences Education</em> (2007) <em>Understanding by Design: A Framework for Effecting Curricular Development and Assessment</em>. <a href="https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC1885909/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read it</a></td>
<td>A peer reviewed account of the three stages in use, and the WHERE prompt for designing stage three activities.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>British Council, <em>Planning lessons and courses</em>. <a href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/sites/teacheng/files/J105_02_Planning_lessons_and%20courses_FINAL_0.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read it</a></td>
<td>The alignment principle in ELT terms: activities link to the learning outcome, and each stage builds on the one before it.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Council of Europe, <em>The CEFR Levels</em>. <a href="https://www.coe.int/en/web/common-european-framework-reference-languages/level-descriptions" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read it</a></td>
<td>The can do descriptors that give a language course a ready made vocabulary for stage one.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Wiggins, G. and McTighe, J. (2005) <em>Understanding by Design</em>, 2nd edition. Alexandria, VA: ASCD.</td>
<td>The original full statement of the framework and its template.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Tyler, R.W. (1949) <em>Basic Principles of Curriculum and Instruction</em>. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.</td>
<td>The earlier ends first rationale that backward design descends from.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Richards, J.C. (2013) Curriculum approaches in language teaching: forward, central and backward design. <em>RELC Journal</em>, 44(1).</td>
<td>The forward, central and backward distinction as it applies specifically to language curriculum.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Biggs, J. (1996) Enhancing teaching through constructive alignment. <em>Higher Education</em>, 32(3).</td>
<td>Constructive alignment, the closest neighbouring idea.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Hutchinson, T. and Waters, A. (1987) <em>English for Specific Purposes</em>. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.</td>
<td>Target needs and learning needs, the distinction that feeds stage one.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table><figcaption>Sources for this definition, checked on 28 September 2026.</figcaption></figure>
<div style="margin: 26px 0; padding: 22px 24px; border-left: 5px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 8px; background: #f4fcfb;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .1em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #0f2233;">In the classroom</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px;">
<li style="margin-bottom: 8px;">Write stage one as something a learner does, not as something you cover. If the sentence contains a grammar name, it is probably content in disguise.</li>
<li style="margin-bottom: 8px;">Write the marking criteria before the first lesson, and show them to the group. A criterion a learner has seen is a target; one they have not is a trap.</li>
<li style="margin-bottom: 8px;">Build two small pieces of interim evidence as well as the final task. One culminating performance is a fragile record of a whole course.</li>
<li style="margin-bottom: 0;">Expect the plan to shorten. If backward design has not removed anything from your syllabus, you have most likely planned forwards and written the outcome afterwards.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>What is backward design in simple terms?</h3>
<p>It is planning in reverse. You decide what learners should be able to do at the end, then decide what would count as proof they can do it, and only then plan the lessons that get them there. The name refers to the order of planning, not to anything about the teaching itself.</p>
<h3>What are the three stages of backward design?</h3>
<p>Identify desired results, determine acceptable evidence, and plan learning experiences and instruction. The three come from Wiggins and McTighe&#8217;s Understanding by Design framework, and the requirement that ties them together is alignment: what stage one names must be what stage two assesses and what stage three teaches.</p>
<h3>Is backward design the same as Understanding by Design?</h3>
<p>Not quite. Understanding by Design, often shortened to UbD, is the wider framework Wiggins and McTighe built, including the template, the six facets of understanding and the design standards. Backward design is the planning sequence at its centre. In everyday staffroom use the two names are treated as interchangeable, and little is lost by that.</p>
<h3>How does backward design work in a language classroom?</h3>
<p>Stage one is usually written as a can do statement of the kind the CEFR uses, because language courses already describe ability that way. Stage two is a performance task that resembles the real situation, such as a phone call, an interview or a written enquiry. Stage three is then the lexis, structures and skills work that the task turns out to require, which is often less than a coursebook unit would have covered.</p>
<h3>Is backward design the same as teaching to the test?</h3>
<p>No, although they can look similar from outside. Teaching to the test takes an existing exam and works back from its format. Backward design starts from what you want learners to be able to do in the world and then designs evidence for that. The two coincide only when the exam happens to measure the thing you actually wanted.</p>
<h3>What are the criticisms of backward design?</h3>
<p>Two are worth taking seriously. Its evidence base is adoption and practitioner report rather than controlled comparison, so it is a planning discipline rather than a measured intervention. And the full template is heavy for a teacher with several classes, which in practice means the paperwork gets abandoned before the idea does. Keeping the three moves and dropping the forms is a reasonable response to both.</p>
<div style="margin: 26px 0; padding: 20px 22px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-radius: 10px; background: #fbfdfd;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 8px; font-size: 12px; letter-spacing: .1em; text-transform: uppercase; color: #6b7c88;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: 15px;">tefl.ai (2026) <em>Backward Design</em>. TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary. Available at: https://tefl.ai/backward-design/ (Accessed: 28 September 2026).</p>
</div>
<h2>Related terms</h2>
<p>Backward design sits in the assessment and course design family of the glossary, alongside <a href="https://tefl.ai/needs-analysis/">needs analysis</a>, which supplies stage one, and <a href="https://tefl.ai/washback/">washback</a>, which describes what happens when the evidence chosen in stage two starts to reshape the teaching. The full set of twenty terms is in the <a href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</p>
<p>For the qualification and career terminology that sits outside this glossary, see <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL qualifications and terminology explained</a> from The TEFL Institute, and its step by step guide to <a href="https://teflinstitute.com/blog/learn-how-to-design-a-tefl-curriculum-with-clear-goals-learner-needs-curriculum-mapping-scaffolding-assessment-and-flexible-planning/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">building a TEFL curriculum</a>, which covers the wider mapping work this term sits inside. For teachers planning an accredited module inside an Irish school timetable, The TEFL Institute of Ireland&#8217;s <a href="https://tefl.ie/transition-year-tefl-programmes-guide/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">guide to Transition Year TEFL programmes</a> is a worked case of a course written around a stated outcome.</p>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #6b7c88;">Last updated: 28 September 2026.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">
{
 "@context": "https://schema.org",
 "@graph": [
  {
   "@type": "DefinedTerm",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/#definedterm",
   "name": "Backward Design",
   "alternateName": [
    "Understanding by Design",
    "UbD",
    "Backwards design",
    "Backward design model"
   ],
   "description": "Backward design is a three stage planning sequence in which a teacher first sets the learning outcome, then decides what evidence would prove learners have reached it, and only then plans the lessons. Popularised by Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe, it replaces planning that begins with activities or with the next page of the coursebook.",
   "url": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/",
   "sameAs": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#backward-design",
   "inDefinedTermSet": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"
   }
  },
  {
   "@type": "Article",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/#article",
   "headline": "Backward Design: Definition, Three Stages and a Classroom Example",
   "description": "Backward design is a three stage planning sequence in which a teacher first sets the learning outcome, then decides what evidence would prove learners have reached it, and only then plans the lessons. Popularised by Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe, it replaces planning that begins with activities or with the next page of the coursebook.",
   "mainEntityOfPage": {
    "@type": "WebPage",
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/"
   },
   "about": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/#definedterm"
   },
   "isPartOf": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"
   },
   "inLanguage": "en-GB",
   "datePublished": "2026-09-28",
   "dateModified": "2026-09-28",
   "author": {
    "@type": "Person",
    "name": "Katie Troy"
   },
   "publisher": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"
   },
   "citation": [
    "McTighe, J. and Wiggins, G. (2012) Understanding by Design Framework. ASCD white paper.",
    "Jones, K.A., Vermette, P.J. and Jones, J.L. (2007) Understanding by Design: A Framework for Effecting Curricular Development and Assessment. CBE Life Sciences Education.",
    "British Council, Planning lessons and courses. TeachingEnglish.",
    "Council of Europe, The CEFR Levels, Common European Framework of Reference for Languages.",
    "Wiggins, G. and McTighe, J. (2005) Understanding by Design, 2nd edition. Alexandria, VA: ASCD.",
    "Tyler, R.W. (1949) Basic Principles of Curriculum and Instruction. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.",
    "Richards, J.C. (2013) Curriculum approaches in language teaching: forward, central and backward design. RELC Journal, 44(1).",
    "Biggs, J. (1996) Enhancing teaching through constructive alignment. Higher Education, 32(3).",
    "Hutchinson, T. and Waters, A. (1987) English for Specific Purposes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press."
   ]
  },
  {
   "@type": "FAQPage",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/#faq",
   "mainEntity": [
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "What is backward design in simple terms?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "It is planning in reverse. You decide what learners should be able to do at the end, then decide what would count as proof they can do it, and only then plan the lessons that get them there. The name refers to the order of planning, not to anything about the teaching itself."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "What are the three stages of backward design?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Identify desired results, determine acceptable evidence, and plan learning experiences and instruction. The three come from Wiggins and McTighe's Understanding by Design framework, and the requirement that ties them together is alignment: what stage one names must be what stage two assesses and what stage three teaches."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "Is backward design the same as Understanding by Design?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Not quite. Understanding by Design, often shortened to UbD, is the wider framework Wiggins and McTighe built, including the template, the six facets of understanding and the design standards. Backward design is the planning sequence at its centre. In everyday staffroom use the two names are treated as interchangeable, and little is lost by that."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "How does backward design work in a language classroom?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Stage one is usually written as a can do statement of the kind the CEFR uses, because language courses already describe ability that way. Stage two is a performance task that resembles the real situation, such as a phone call, an interview or a written enquiry. Stage three is then the lexis, structures and skills work that the task turns out to require, which is often less than a coursebook unit would have covered."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "Is backward design the same as teaching to the test?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "No, although they can look similar from outside. Teaching to the test takes an existing exam and works back from its format. Backward design starts from what you want learners to be able to do in the world and then designs evidence for that. The two coincide only when the exam happens to measure the thing you actually wanted."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "What are the criticisms of backward design?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Two are worth taking seriously. Its evidence base is adoption and practitioner report rather than controlled comparison, so it is a planning discipline rather than a measured intervention. And the full template is heavy for a teacher with several classes, which in practice means the paperwork gets abandoned before the idea does. Keeping the three moves and dropping the forms is a reasonable response to both."
     }
    }
   ]
  },
  {
   "@type": "BreadcrumbList",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/#glossary-breadcrumb",
   "itemListElement": [
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 1,
     "name": "Home",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/"
    },
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 2,
     "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"
    },
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 3,
     "name": "Backward Design",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/backward-design/"
    }
   ]
  }
 ]
}
</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Eliciting</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/eliciting/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Katie Troy]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 28 Sep 2026 18:02:54 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Uncategorised]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[English teachers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[questioning techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[vocabulary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3143</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Eliciting is the set of techniques a teacher uses to draw language, ideas or knowledge out of learners rather than presenting it to them. The teacher supplies a prompt, usually a picture, a context or a question, and the learners supply the answer.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="margin: 0 0 24px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 19px; line-height: 1.62; color: #0f2233;">Eliciting is the set of techniques a teacher uses to draw language, ideas or knowledge out of learners rather than presenting it to them. The teacher supplies a prompt, usually a picture, a context or a question, and the learners supply the answer. It is both a teaching technique and a diagnostic one.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; border-radius: 14px; padding: 26px 28px; margin: 0 0 28px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: .16em; font-size: 12px; font-weight: 800; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 14px; color: #fff; font-size: 16px; line-height: 1.65;">Eliciting reverses who does the talking at the moment new language appears. Instead of writing the word on the board and explaining it, the teacher builds a situation the word belongs in and asks the class to supply it. What comes back is the language, and also a free reading of what the class already knows.</p>
<p style="margin: 0; color: #dbe8ec; font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.65;">Part of the <a style="color: #9cf3e4; font-weight: 600;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</p>
</div>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">What eliciting is for</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 18px;">The British Council&#8217;s guidance sets out three premises behind the technique: that a class collectively holds a great deal of language and world knowledge which needs activating, that new knowledge is usually built on what learners already have, and that <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/managing-lesson/eliciting" target="_blank" rel="noopener">questioning assists in self discovery, which makes information more memorable</a>. The same guidance quotes the definition given in the <em>Dictionary of Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics</em>, &#8220;Techniques or procedures which a teacher uses to get learners to actively produce speech or writing&#8221;, and notes that this is wider than vocabulary alone.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 18px;">That width is the part most trainees miss. A teacher can elicit vocabulary and grammatical form, and can just as usefully elicit ideas, feelings, situations, associations and memories. The British Council&#8217;s teaching knowledge database entry describes <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/elicitation" target="_blank" rel="noopener">elicitation as a learner centred technique for teaching grammar and vocabulary</a>, with the first conditional as its worked example: the teacher puts examples on the board and writes &#8220;We make the first conditional in English with&#8230;?&#8221; rather than stating the rule.</p>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">What a teacher can elicit, with the prompt each usually needs.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">What is elicited</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">The prompt that works</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Where in the lesson</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Vocabulary</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A picture, a mime, a definition, a gapped sentence, an opposite already on the board</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Pre-teaching before a text, or at the point of need</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Grammatical form and rule</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Two or three example sentences on the board and an unfinished statement of the pattern</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The presentation stage, or the language focus after a task</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Meaning and use</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A short dialogue or text, then closed questions about time, certainty and speaker intention</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Immediately after form, combined with concept checking</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Topic knowledge and ideas</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A photograph, a headline, a short anecdote from the teacher, a video still</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Lead in to a reading or listening lesson</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Pronunciation</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The written word plus a request for stress placement, or a mouth shape the class copies</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">With the item, not in a separate lesson</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">What the class already knows</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A mind map or a know, want to know, learnt chart built on the board</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The start of anything, and again at the end as a record</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">The diagnostic use is the one worth protecting. Eliciting tells a teacher what the learners know or do not know before the plan is committed to, which makes it the cheapest form of assessment available and a natural companion to <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/needs-analysis/">needs analysis</a>. A teacher who elicits at the top of a lesson and finds the class already has the target language has saved twenty minutes and learned something a lesson plan could not have told them.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">A worked classroom example</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 18px;">A B1 class of fourteen adults, a reading text about commuting, and one item the text depends on: <em>exhausted</em>. The teacher has ninety seconds to get it into the room. The sequence below is the one that works, and the column on the right is what makes it work.</p>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">Eliciting the word &#8220;exhausted&#8221; from a B1 class before a reading text.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Move</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">What is said or shown</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Why this move and not another</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">1. Build the situation</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8220;It is Friday. I got up at five. I worked eleven hours. I got home at nine. How do I feel?&#8221;</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Context first. Without it the question is a guessing game and the class stays silent</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">2. Accept the near miss</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A learner offers &#8220;tired&#8221;. Teacher: &#8220;Yes, tired. Very, very tired. Is there a stronger word?&#8221;</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The near miss is the ladder. Rejecting it costs the volunteer and the next three</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">3. Narrow the prompt</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Teacher writes &#8220;I am completely ex_______&#8221; on the board and waits</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Input is required. Eliciting is not an excuse for withholding, it is staged giving</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">4. Take it and check it</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8220;Exhausted, good. Am I a little tired or very tired? Can I work now? Yes or no?&#8221;</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The eliciting produced the word. The concept questions confirm the meaning landed</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">5. Hand it back</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8220;Where is the stress? Say it. Now tell your partner about the last time you felt it&#8221;</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Pronunciation and personalisation in one move, and the teacher stops talking</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">Two things make the difference between this and the version that dies. The first is that the situation comes before the question. The second is step three: the teacher had a narrowing prompt ready and used it after one exchange rather than asking the same question four more times in a hopeful voice. The British Council&#8217;s own advice is blunt about this, warning teachers not to &#8220;pull teeth&#8221; and to treat prolonged silence or wrong answers as a signal that input is required.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Commonly confused</h2>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">Eliciting compared with the techniques it is most often mistaken for.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Eliciting is not</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">The difference</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Socratic questioning</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The British Council draws this line explicitly. Eliciting is designed to find out what the learners know. Socratic questioning leads them to a conclusion only the teacher holds. The shapes look identical and the purposes are opposite.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Concept checking questions</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Eliciting comes first and gets the item into the room. Concept checking comes after and tests whether the meaning is secure. A lesson that only elicits never confirms; one that only concept checks had to present the language itself.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Drilling</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Drilling repeats a form the teacher has supplied, to build accuracy and confidence. Eliciting asks the learners to supply it. They sit next to each other in a lesson and answer different questions.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Guided discovery</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Guided discovery is a whole lesson shape in which learners work out a rule from data, usually on a worksheet and usually in pairs. Eliciting is a single move, lasting seconds, which that shape uses repeatedly.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Brainstorming</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Brainstorming gathers quantity with no target in mind. Eliciting is usually aimed at a specific item the lesson needs next. A lead in brainstorm is one kind of eliciting; most eliciting is not a brainstorm.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Display questions in general</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A display question asks for information the teacher already has, and classroom research has long counted them as the dominant question type. Eliciting uses display questions deliberately and briefly. Asking them all lesson is not eliciting, it is interrogation.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">The first two rows account for most of the confusion on teacher training courses. A trainee told to elicit more and concept check more frequently does both at once, producing a question that neither draws out language nor tests meaning. Keeping the two moves in order, elicit then check, fixes it in a lesson.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Where the idea sits, and the caveat that matters most</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">Eliciting is old enough that nobody owns it, but its analytical home is the study of classroom discourse. Sinclair and Coulthard&#8217;s 1975 description of the English used by teachers and pupils named elicitation as a class of act within the three part exchange of initiation, response and feedback, which is still the standard way of describing what happens when a teacher asks and a class answers. Long and Sato later separated display questions, which ask for what the teacher already knows, from referential questions, which ask for what the teacher does not, and found classroom talk dominated by the first. Brock&#8217;s 1986 study in <em>TESOL Quarterly</em> then showed that raising the proportion of referential questions produced longer and syntactically more complex learner responses.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">The practical reading of that literature is not that display questions are bad. Eliciting a known word from a class is a display question and it works. The reading is that a lesson made entirely of them limits what learners produce, which is why eliciting belongs alongside referential work rather than replacing it.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">The caveat that matters most in an international classroom is cultural, and the British Council states it plainly. An open invitation such as &#8220;Who can tell me something about&#8230;?&#8221; is met with silence in many settings, and the learners are then wrongly labelled as ignorant or shy when the reason is that volunteering information, or standing out from the group either as a success or a failure, is not done. The recommended corrections are practical: nominate rather than wait for volunteers, so that no learner chooses to stand out; give thinking time, and allow an answer to be written down first; ask questions with no right answer at the lead in stage; and encourage rather than correct, because confidence and not accuracy is what is being built at that moment.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">The other reason to elicit is arithmetical. Every answer a learner supplies is an answer the teacher did not have to say, which is why the technique is the fastest available lever on <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/">teacher talking time and student talking time</a>, and why it appears in the presentation stage of almost every <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">presentation, practice, production</a> lesson a trainee is asked to plan.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Sources</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.65; margin: 0 0 14px; font-size: 14px; color: #4a5b66;">The two linked sources below were fetched and confirmed live on 21 September 2026. The rest are cited bibliographically without a link, because this site does not publish links it has not checked.</p>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">Sources for this definition. Checked 21 September 2026.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Source</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Reference</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">What it contributes</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">British Council, TeachingEnglish</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Eliciting&#8217;, first published 2009, updated 2025. <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/managing-lesson/eliciting" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read it at TeachingEnglish</a>.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The fullest practitioner account: the three premises, the tools, the classroom dialogues, the cultural caveat and the distinction from Socratic questioning.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">British Council, Teaching Knowledge Database</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Elicitation&#8217;. <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/d-h/elicitation" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read it at TeachingEnglish</a>.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The short reference definition, the first conditional example, and the three stated reasons the technique is used.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Richards, J. C. and Schmidt, R.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;"><em>Longman Dictionary of Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics</em>. Harlow: Pearson Education.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The standard reference definition quoted above: techniques or procedures a teacher uses to get learners to actively produce speech or writing.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Sinclair, J. McH. and Coulthard, R. M. (1975)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;"><em>Towards an Analysis of Discourse: The English Used by Teachers and Pupils</em>. London: Oxford University Press.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Names elicitation as a class of act inside the initiation, response and feedback exchange. The analytical origin of the term as used in classroom research.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Long, M. H. and Sato, C. J. (1983)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Classroom Foreigner Talk Discourse: Forms and Functions of Teachers&#8217; Questions&#8217;, in Seliger, H. W. and Long, M. H. (eds.) <em>Classroom Oriented Research in Second Language Acquisition</em>. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The display and referential question distinction, and the finding that classroom talk is dominated by questions whose answers the teacher already has.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Brock, C. A. (1986)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;The Effects of Referential Questions on ESL Classroom Discourse&#8217;, <em>TESOL Quarterly</em> 20(1), pp. 47 to 59.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The evidence that referential questions produce longer and syntactically more complex learner responses than display questions do.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Scrivener, J. (2011)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;"><em>Learning Teaching: The Essential Guide to English Language Teaching</em>. 3rd edn. Oxford: Macmillan Education.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The standard teacher training treatment of eliciting as a classroom move, alongside concept checking and guided discovery.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Harmer, J. (2015)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;"><em>The Practice of English Language Teaching</em>. 5th edn. Harlow: Pearson Education.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Places eliciting within the wider question of teacher roles and the balance of teacher and learner talk in a communicative classroom.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Doff, A. (1988)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;"><em>Teach English: A Training Course for Teachers</em>. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The training course treatment of eliciting and of prompting, written for teachers working with large classes and limited materials.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 5px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 10px; background: #fbfdfd; padding: 22px 24px; margin: 0 0 28px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 12px; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: .14em; font-size: 12px; font-weight: 800; color: #0f6b7d;">In the classroom</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.75;">
<li><strong>Build the situation before you ask the question.</strong> Almost every failed elicitation is a question asked into a context the class has not been given yet.</li>
<li><strong>Have the narrowing prompt ready.</strong> A first letter, a gapped sentence, a mime. Use it after one unsuccessful exchange rather than repeating yourself.</li>
<li><strong>Nominate rather than wait.</strong> In classes where volunteering is not the norm, naming a learner removes the social cost of standing out and is kinder than the silence.</li>
<li><strong>Take the near miss.</strong> &#8220;Tired&#8221; is the route to &#8220;exhausted&#8221;. Rejecting it outright costs you that learner for the rest of the lesson.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 14px;">Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">What does eliciting mean in teaching?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Eliciting means drawing language, ideas or knowledge out of learners instead of presenting it to them. The teacher provides a prompt, such as a picture, a situation or a gapped sentence, and the class supplies the word, the rule or the idea. It is used to make learning more memorable, to keep the classroom learner centred, and to find out what a group already knows before teaching it something it does not need.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">What is the difference between eliciting and concept checking questions?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">They run in sequence and do different jobs. Eliciting gets the item into the room by asking the learners to produce it. Concept checking questions come afterwards and test whether the meaning has actually landed, usually through short closed questions with yes or no answers. If you elicit and never check, you have the word without knowing it is understood. If you only check, something else had to supply the word first.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">Is eliciting the same as Socratic questioning?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">No, and the British Council draws the line directly. Eliciting is designed to find out what learners know. Socratic questioning is designed to lead learners to a conclusion which only the teacher holds. The two can look identical from the back of the room, because both consist of a teacher asking a series of questions, but the purposes point in opposite directions and so does what the teacher does with an unexpected answer.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">How does eliciting reduce teacher talking time?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Mechanically. Every item a learner supplies is an item the teacher did not explain, and the explanation is usually the longest turn in the exchange. The effect is not only arithmetical: a class that expects to be asked stays alert in a way a class that expects to be told does not. Eliciting is the most reliable single adjustment a teacher can make to the balance of talk in a lesson.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">What should you do when eliciting produces silence?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Give input rather than repeating the question. Prolonged silence usually means the context was thin, the question was too open for the level, or volunteering is not something this group does. Narrow the prompt, nominate a learner by name, allow thinking or writing time, or simply supply the item and move on. The British Council&#8217;s advice is not to pull teeth: an elicitation that has failed twice has told you something useful and should be ended.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">Can you elicit from beginners?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Yes, with tighter questions. At lower levels open ended questions should be avoided, because learners are unlikely to have the language to answer them to their own satisfaction, and the attempt produces frustration rather than production. Guided questioning works instead: yes or no questions, choices between two options, gapped sentences on the board and heavy visual support. Learners can also elicit from each other, which shifts attention away from the teacher and builds confidence.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Related entries</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">Next in the glossary: <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/">teacher talking time and student talking time</a>, which is the measure eliciting moves, and <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">presentation, practice, production</a>, where eliciting does most of its work in the first stage. The full <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a> holds every entry. For the qualifications and career terminology that sits alongside the teaching vocabulary, see the Institute&#8217;s <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL qualifications and terminology explained</a>. Teachers preparing for interview in Ireland will find this asked directly in <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ie/common-tefl-interview-questions-answers/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">common TEFL interview questions and answers</a>, where &#8220;how would you teach grammar&#8221; is normally answered by eliciting the rule from examples rather than stating it.</p>
<div style="border: 1px dashed #d5dbdf; border-radius: 10px; padding: 18px 20px; margin: 0 0 20px; background: #fafcfc;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 6px; font-weight: bold; color: #0f2233; font-size: 15px;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: 14px; line-height: 1.7; color: #4a5b66;">tefl.ai (2026) &#8216;Eliciting&#8217;, <em>TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques: A Teacher&#8217;s Glossary</em>. Available at: https://tefl.ai/eliciting/ (Accessed: 21 September 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #4a5b66; margin: 0;"><strong>Last updated:</strong> 21 September 2026 · <strong>Written by:</strong> Katie Troy, tefl.ai · <strong>Review cycle:</strong> definitions are re-checked against their cited sources every six months.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">{
 "@context": "https://schema.org",
 "@graph": [
  {
   "@type": "DefinedTerm",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/#definition",
   "name": "Eliciting",
   "alternateName": [
    "Elicitation",
    "Elicit",
    "Eliciting language",
    "Eliciting in teaching"
   ],
   "description": "Eliciting is the set of techniques a teacher uses to draw language, ideas or knowledge out of learners rather than presenting it to them. The teacher supplies a prompt, usually a picture, a context or a question, and the learners supply the answer. It is both a teaching technique and a diagnostic one.",
   "url": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/",
   "sameAs": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#eliciting",
   "inDefinedTermSet": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"
   }
  },
  {
   "@type": "Article",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/#article",
   "headline": "Eliciting",
   "description": "What eliciting means in English language teaching, what a teacher can elicit and how, a worked classroom example, and how it differs from concept checking and Socratic questioning.",
   "inLanguage": "en-GB",
   "datePublished": "2026-09-21",
   "dateModified": "2026-09-21",
   "mainEntityOfPage": {
    "@type": "WebPage",
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/"
   },
   "isPartOf": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"
   },
   "about": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/#definition"
   },
   "author": {
    "@type": "Person",
    "name": "Katie Troy"
   },
   "publisher": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"
   },
   "citation": [
    "British Council, TeachingEnglish, 'Eliciting', first published 2009, updated 2025.",
    "British Council, TeachingEnglish Teaching Knowledge Database, 'Elicitation'.",
    "Richards, J. C. and Schmidt, R., Longman Dictionary of Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics. Harlow: Pearson Education.",
    "Sinclair, J. McH. and Coulthard, R. M. (1975) Towards an Analysis of Discourse: The English Used by Teachers and Pupils. London: Oxford University Press.",
    "Long, M. H. and Sato, C. J. (1983) 'Classroom Foreigner Talk Discourse: Forms and Functions of Teachers' Questions', in Seliger, H. W. and Long, M. H. (eds.) Classroom Oriented Research in Second Language Acquisition. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.",
    "Brock, C. A. (1986) 'The Effects of Referential Questions on ESL Classroom Discourse', TESOL Quarterly 20(1), pp. 47 to 59.",
    "Scrivener, J. (2011) Learning Teaching: The Essential Guide to English Language Teaching. 3rd edn. Oxford: Macmillan Education.",
    "Harmer, J. (2015) The Practice of English Language Teaching. 5th edn. Harlow: Pearson Education.",
    "Doff, A. (1988) Teach English: A Training Course for Teachers. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press."
   ]
  },
  {
   "@type": "FAQPage",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/#faq",
   "mainEntity": [
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "What does eliciting mean in teaching?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Eliciting means drawing language, ideas or knowledge out of learners instead of presenting it to them. The teacher provides a prompt, such as a picture, a situation or a gapped sentence, and the class supplies the word, the rule or the idea. It is used to make learning more memorable, to keep the classroom learner centred, and to find out what a group already knows before teaching it something it does not need."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "What is the difference between eliciting and concept checking questions?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "They run in sequence and do different jobs. Eliciting gets the item into the room by asking the learners to produce it. Concept checking questions come afterwards and test whether the meaning has actually landed, usually through short closed questions with yes or no answers. If you elicit and never check, you have the word without knowing it is understood. If you only check, something else had to supply the word first."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "Is eliciting the same as Socratic questioning?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "No, and the British Council draws the line directly. Eliciting is designed to find out what learners know. Socratic questioning is designed to lead learners to a conclusion which only the teacher holds. The two can look identical from the back of the room, because both consist of a teacher asking a series of questions, but the purposes point in opposite directions and so does what the teacher does with an unexpected answer."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "How does eliciting reduce teacher talking time?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Mechanically. Every item a learner supplies is an item the teacher did not explain, and the explanation is usually the longest turn in the exchange. The effect is not only arithmetical: a class that expects to be asked stays alert in a way a class that expects to be told does not. Eliciting is the most reliable single adjustment a teacher can make to the balance of talk in a lesson."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "What should you do when eliciting produces silence?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Give input rather than repeating the question. Prolonged silence usually means the context was thin, the question was too open for the level, or volunteering is not something this group does. Narrow the prompt, nominate a learner by name, allow thinking or writing time, or simply supply the item and move on. The British Council's advice is not to pull teeth: an elicitation that has failed twice has told you something useful and should be ended."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "Can you elicit from beginners?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Yes, with tighter questions. At lower levels open ended questions should be avoided, because learners are unlikely to have the language to answer them to their own satisfaction, and the attempt produces frustration rather than production. Guided questioning works instead: yes or no questions, choices between two options, gapped sentences on the board and heavy visual support. Learners can also elicit from each other, which shifts attention away from the teacher and builds confidence."
     }
    }
   ]
  },
  {
   "@type": "BreadcrumbList",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/#breadcrumb",
   "itemListElement": [
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 1,
     "name": "tefl.ai",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/"
    },
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 2,
     "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"
    },
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 3,
     "name": "Eliciting",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/eliciting/"
    }
   ]
  }
 ]
}</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Teacher Talking Time vs Student Talking Time</title>
		<link>https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Tara Bourke]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 18 Sep 2026 08:37:46 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Teaching Methods & Techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[classroom techniques]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ESL curriculum]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ESL Teaching]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[lesson planning]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[teaching methods]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[TEFL glossary]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tefl.ai/?p=3052</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Teacher talking time is the proportion of a lesson the teacher spends speaking; student talking time is the proportion the learners do. The pair describes the balance of a lesson rather than setting a target, and the useful question is what the teacher's talk is doing, not simply how much of it there is.]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="margin: 0 0 24px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 19px; line-height: 1.62; color: #0f2233;">Teacher talking time is the proportion of a lesson the teacher spends speaking; student talking time is the proportion the learners do. The pair is used to describe the balance of a lesson rather than to set a target, and the useful question is what the teacher&#8217;s talk is doing, not simply how much of it there is.</p>
<div style="background: #0F2233; border-radius: 14px; padding: 26px 28px; margin: 0 0 28px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 10px; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: .16em; font-size: 12px; font-weight: 800; color: #9cf3e4;">The short version</p>
<p style="margin: 0 0 14px; color: #fff; font-size: 16px; line-height: 1.65;">TTT and STT are the two halves of one measurement: who is speaking. They became a standard part of teacher training because a lesson in which the teacher speaks for most of the hour gives fifteen learners about two minutes each. The trap is treating the total as the finding. What an observer should record is the category of teacher talk, because instruction, modelling and feedback are the job, and echoing, repeating and filling silence are not.</p>
<p style="margin: 0; color: #dbe8ec; font-size: 15px; line-height: 1.65;">Part of the <a style="color: #9cf3e4; font-weight: 600;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</p>
</div>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">What the two terms actually measure</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 18px;">Teacher talking time and student talking time are observation categories before they are anything else. They were designed to be counted by somebody sitting at the back of a room, which is why they are coarse: they record who is speaking and nothing about whether the speaking is any good. The table below sets out what each term covers and what it leaves out.</p>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">Teacher talking time and student talking time compared as observation categories.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Term</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">What it counts</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">What it does not capture</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Typical use</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Teacher talking time (TTT)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Every stretch in which the teacher is the one speaking: instructions, presentation, questions, correction, feedback and filler</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Whether the talk was necessary, clear or well timed. Two teachers can post the same figure and run very different lessons</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Observation feedback, self evaluation, initial teacher training</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Student talking time (STT)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Every stretch in which learners are speaking, including pair and group work where several speak at once</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Whether learners produced extended turns or one word answers, and whether they spoke in English</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The same, usually quoted as the counterpart figure</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">The ratio</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The split between the two across a whole lesson, quoted as a percentage</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The shape of the lesson. Ten minutes of unbroken teacher talk and ten minutes spread thinly are not the same thing</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A prompt for discussion after an observation</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Category of teacher talk</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The same minutes sorted into instruction, model, feedback and filler</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Nothing much. This is the version that produces a usable action point</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Self evaluation, and the more useful half of an observation</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">The British Council&#8217;s teaching knowledge entry puts the definition plainly: teacher talking time is the time that teachers spend talking in class, rather than learners, and student talking time is the time learners spend talking rather than the teacher. Both, it notes, are useful categories for observation of teaching or for self reflection about teaching. That is the honest scope of the pair. They are lenses, not verdicts.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">How it is used in practice</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">The arithmetic that made TTT a standard training topic is simple. Steve Darn, writing for the British Council, puts it this way: <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/managing-lesson/pros-and-cons-teacher-talking-time" target="_blank" rel="noopener">if the teacher talks for half the time in a 60 minute lesson with 15 students, each student gets only 2 minutes to speak</a>. Nobody learns to swim in two minutes a week, and that is the whole argument in one line.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">The argument on the other side is equally real. The same source lists the forms of teacher talk that earn their place: personalised presentations, questioning, natural conversation and storytelling. In a monolingual classroom the teacher may be the only source of natural spoken English in the room, and roughly tuned teacher speech is comprehensible input rather than dead air. Silence is also doing work. Darn notes that it <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/managing-lesson/pros-and-cons-teacher-talking-time" target="_blank" rel="noopener">provides processing time between instructions, during explanations, while waiting for a student to respond, and during monitoring of activities</a>, and that prompting or rephrasing is often counterproductive when the learner simply needs a moment.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">So the practical use is diagnostic, not prescriptive. Declan Cooley, also writing for the British Council, describes the problem as leakage rather than volume: unhelpful teacher talk <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://britishcouncil.org/voices-magazine/english-teachers-are-you-talking-too-much-class" target="_blank" rel="noopener">can leak out in many small, often unnoticed, ways</a>, and he names four of them, which are repeating instructions, saying far more than the learner when receiving a contribution, asking long and elaborately polite questions, and echoing answers the class has already heard. None of those four is a decision a teacher makes. They are habits, which is why measuring is the first step and why Cooley says the first step to reducing teacher talk is simply being aware of it.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">Reducing teacher talk is mostly a matter of changing the interaction pattern rather than exercising restraint. Group work with the teacher monitoring raises learner output at a stroke, because several learners speak at once. So does <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#eliciting">eliciting</a> instead of presenting, demonstrating an instruction rather than narrating it, and cutting the echo. The stage where teacher talk reliably balloons is the presentation stage of a <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">presentation, practice, production lesson</a>, which is one of the standing criticisms of that shape.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">A worked example: coding one recorded lesson</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 18px;">A teacher records a 60 minute upper intermediate general English lesson, fifteen learners, and listens back with a timer, marking every stretch of teacher talk into one of four categories. The total came to 26 minutes, or 43 per cent, which by the usual rule of thumb is unremarkable. The breakdown is where the lesson is.</p>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">One 60 minute lesson, 26 minutes of teacher talk sorted by category.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Category</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Minutes</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">What it was</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Verdict</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Instruction</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">7</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Setting up three activities, twice each, plus two restatements after learners started anyway</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Too long. Every set of instructions was given, then given again in different words, which teaches the class that the first telling can be ignored</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Model and input</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">6</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A short anecdote leading into the target language, plus two clarifications at the board</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Earning its place. This is the personalised presentation the British Council defends, and it is the input the class would not otherwise get</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Feedback and correction</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">4</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Delayed correction of six errors collected during the speaking task, plus praise</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Well spent, and the shortest category, which is the wrong way round for a class at this level</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Echo and filler</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">9</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Repeating learner answers, filling pauses, narrating what the class could see, and thinking aloud</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The finding. Nine minutes is more than a third of the teacher talk and it is the category with no defenders</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Where it fell</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">n/a</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The single longest unbroken block of teacher talk, 4 minutes, landed inside the 12 minute group discussion</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The real problem. Monitoring out loud collapsed the one stage of the lesson designed to maximise learner output</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">The finding that matters is the last row, and it is not the one the percentage would have surfaced. Forty three per cent is a defensible total; four minutes of teacher talk inside a twelve minute discussion is not, because the discussion was the part of the lesson where the learners were supposed to be doing the work. This is the argument for coding the talk by category and by position in the lesson, rather than reporting one figure. A teacher told to talk less will usually trim the anecdote, which was the useful part. A teacher shown this table stops monitoring out loud, which costs nothing and returns four minutes of learner speech immediately.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Commonly confused</h2>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">Teacher talking time compared with the ideas it is most often mistaken for.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Teacher talking time is not</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">The difference</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Teacher talk</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Teacher talking time is a quantity. Teacher talk is the language itself and its quality. Cullen&#8217;s 1998 argument was that the profession had confused the two and had started treating less talk as better talk, which does not follow.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">A target of 30 per cent</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The figures in circulation are training heuristics, not findings. They are useful for making a novice notice the problem and useless as a standard to be assessed against, because the right proportion depends on the level, the stage and the aim.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Wait time</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Wait time is the pause after a question before the teacher speaks again. It is one specific cause of excess teacher talk rather than a synonym for it, and it is the cheapest single fix available, because extending it costs nothing and requires no planning.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Student talking time in English</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">STT counts learners speaking. It does not ask which language they were speaking or whether the turns were longer than three words. A class can post a healthy STT figure while producing very little English.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">The IRF exchange</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Initiation, response, feedback is the pattern of most classroom talk: the teacher asks, a learner answers, the teacher evaluates. It is a structural reason why the teacher holds two turns in every three, and it explains the figure rather than being measured by it.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">A judgement about the teacher</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">A high figure can mean a teacher who lectures, or it can mean a beginners class that genuinely needed modelling, or a group that would not speak. The number raises a question. It does not answer it.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">The confusion that causes most damage is the second one. Once a ratio becomes a target, teachers optimise for the target, and the easiest way to cut teacher talk is to cut the explanation and the anecdote, which were the parts a learner could not get anywhere else. The glossary entries on <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#drilling">drilling</a> and the <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/affective-filter/">affective filter</a> describe the same trap from other angles: a measurable proxy quietly replaces the thing it was standing in for.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Where the idea came from, and the argument about it</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">The measurement predates the terminology. Interaction analysis in the 1960s, counting classroom moves with an observation schedule, established that teachers do most of the talking. Chaudron&#8217;s 1988 review of second language classroom research reports the first language finding that <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://cambridge.org/core/books/second-language-classrooms/teacher-talk-in-second-language-classrooms/99EACF3F8D4F7BAA49DC89EC7BADC4FE" target="_blank" rel="noopener">teachers tend to do most of the talking, about 60 per cent of the moves</a>, and concludes that the language classroom studies confirm the standard finding of roughly two thirds of classroom speech being attributable to the teacher. Sinclair and Coulthard had already supplied the structural explanation in 1975: classroom discourse runs on an initiation, response, feedback exchange in which the teacher holds two of every three turns by design.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">The terms TTT and STT themselves belong to communicative language teaching and to the initial training certificates that spread it. If the goal is communicative competence, and competence is built by using the language, then a lesson in which learners barely speak is failing on its own terms. Swain&#8217;s output hypothesis in 1985 gave that intuition a theoretical footing by arguing that producing language, not only receiving it, is what pushes a learner to process grammar rather than meaning alone.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 16px;">Then the correction arrived. Thornbury in 1996 had teachers analyse their own classroom talk and found the useful variable was not volume but the kind of question asked and the kind of response invited. Cullen in 1998 made the case most directly: the profession had turned a reasonable observation into a slogan, and the right criterion for teacher talk is whether it is communicative in that classroom, not whether there is little of it. Walsh took the argument furthest, showing in 2002 that teacher talk can construct or obstruct learner participation depending on how it is used, and building a self evaluation framework so that teachers could examine their own talk against the aim of the moment rather than against a percentage.</p>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">Where that leaves a working teacher is unglamorous and sound. The figure is worth knowing once, because almost every teacher who measures it is surprised. After that the question is which category the minutes fall into and where in the lesson they land. A teacher who has never counted is probably talking more than they think; a teacher chasing a ratio is probably cutting the wrong minutes. Every technique named on this page has its own entry in the <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a>.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Sources</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.65; margin: 0 0 14px; font-size: 14px; color: #4a5b66;">Five of the sources below carry a link, and each of those five was fetched and confirmed live on 18 September 2026. The rest are cited bibliographically without a link, because this site does not publish links it has not checked.</p>
<div style="overflow-x: auto; margin: 0 0 26px;">
<table style="width: 100%; min-width: 640px; border-collapse: collapse; font-size: 15px;">
<caption style="text-align: left; color: #4a5b66; padding: 0 0 10px; font-size: 14px;">Sources for this definition. Checked 18 September 2026.</caption>
<thead>
<tr>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Source</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">Reference</th>
<th style="text-align: left; padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; background: #0F2233; color: #fff; font-size: 14px;" scope="col">What it contributes</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">British Council, TeachingEnglish</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Teacher talking time&#8217;, Teaching knowledge database. <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/t-w/teacher-talking-time" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read the entry at TeachingEnglish</a>.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The plain definition used at the top of this page, and the recommendation that a teacher start by recording themselves to find out when, why and how much they and their learners talk.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">British Council, TeachingEnglish</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;STT&#8217;, Teaching knowledge database. <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/teaching-knowledge-database/q-s/stt" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read the entry at TeachingEnglish</a>.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The counterpart definition, and the observation that group work with the teacher monitoring is the standard way to raise student talking time in an activity.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Darn, S. (British Council, TeachingEnglish)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Pros and cons of teacher talking time&#8217;. <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teachingenglish.org.uk/professional-development/teachers/managing-lesson/pros-and-cons-teacher-talking-time" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read the article at TeachingEnglish</a>.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The 60 minute, 15 student arithmetic; the four defensible forms of teacher talk; and the case for silence as processing time.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Cooley, D. (2014) British Council Voices</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;English teachers, are you talking too much in class?&#8217;, 3 December 2014. <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://britishcouncil.org/voices-magazine/english-teachers-are-you-talking-too-much-class" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read the article at the British Council</a>.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The four unnoticed leaks: repeated instructions, over long responses to learner contributions, elaborate questions and echoing. Also the point that awareness comes before change.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Chaudron, C. (1988)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Teacher talk in second language classrooms&#8217;, in <em>Second Language Classrooms: Research on Teaching and Learning</em>. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://cambridge.org/core/books/second-language-classrooms/teacher-talk-in-second-language-classrooms/99EACF3F8D4F7BAA49DC89EC7BADC4FE" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Read the chapter at Cambridge University Press</a>.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The empirical baseline. Reports the finding of about 60 per cent of classroom moves made by the teacher and confirms roughly two thirds of classroom speech as teacher speech.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Sinclair, J. and Coulthard, M. (1975)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;"><em>Towards an Analysis of Discourse: The English Used by Teachers and Pupils</em>. London: Oxford University Press.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The initiation, response, feedback exchange, which is the structural reason the teacher holds two turns in three before anybody has said a word too many.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Swain, M. (1985)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Communicative Competence: Some Roles of Comprehensible Input and Comprehensible Output in its Development&#8217;, in Gass, S. and Madden, C. (eds.) <em>Input in Second Language Acquisition</em>. Rowley: Newbury House.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The output hypothesis, which is the theoretical case for student talking time rather than merely the intuitive one.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Thornbury, S. (1996)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Teachers research teacher talk&#8217;, <em>ELT Journal</em> 50(4), pp. 279 to 289.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">Teachers analysing their own classroom talk. Shifts attention from how much to what kind, particularly the type of question asked.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Cullen, R. (1998)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">&#8216;Teacher talk and the classroom context&#8217;, <em>ELT Journal</em> 52(3), pp. 179 to 187.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The central corrective. Argues that the criterion for teacher talk should be whether it is communicative in that context, not whether there is little of it.</td>
</tr>
<tr style="background: #f6f9f9;">
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 600;">Walsh, S. (2006)</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;"><em>Investigating Classroom Discourse</em>. London: Routledge. See also Walsh, S. (2002) &#8216;Construction or obstruction: teacher talk and learner involvement in the EFL classroom&#8217;, <em>Language Teaching Research</em> 6(1), pp. 3 to 23.</td>
<td style="padding: 10px 12px; border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; vertical-align: top; font-weight: 400;">The self evaluation framework. Teacher talk is judged against the pedagogic goal of the moment, so the same utterance can construct or obstruct learner involvement.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #d5dbdf; border-left: 5px solid #00E3C4; border-radius: 10px; background: #fbfdfd; padding: 22px 24px; margin: 0 0 28px;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 12px; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: .14em; font-size: 12px; font-weight: 800; color: #0f6b7d;">In the classroom</p>
<ul style="margin: 0; padding-left: 20px; line-height: 1.75;">
<li><strong>Record ten minutes, not the whole lesson.</strong> Ten minutes is enough to expose the habit and short enough that you will actually listen back. Mark each stretch as instruction, model, feedback or filler.</li>
<li><strong>Kill the echo first.</strong> Repeating a learner&#8217;s answer is the largest single category of avoidable teacher talk and the easiest to stop. Nod, or ask the learner to say it again louder, and the class learns to listen to each other.</li>
<li><strong>Watch where your talk falls, not just how much there is.</strong> Teacher talk during a speaking task costs far more than the same minutes during a clarification, because it is competing with the learners rather than preparing them.</li>
</ul>
</div>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 14px;">Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">What is a good ratio of teacher talking time to student talking time?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">There is no figure that holds across every lesson, and the ones in circulation, usually 30 per cent teacher and 70 per cent learner, are training heuristics rather than research findings. A beginners class needs more modelling than an advanced discussion class. The ratio is useful as a prompt to look at a lesson, and misleading as a standard to be marked against.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">Is teacher talking time always a bad thing?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">No. The British Council lists personalised presentations, questioning, natural conversation and storytelling as forms of teacher talk that earn their place, and in a monolingual classroom abroad the teacher may be the only source of natural English a learner hears. What displaces learning is unplanned talk: echoing answers, repeating instructions and filling silence.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">How do I measure my own teacher talking time?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Record one lesson on a phone and listen back with a timer, marking each stretch of teacher talk as instruction, model, feedback or filler. The category matters more than the total. Most teachers find the overall figure is defensible and the proportion of filler is not, which is a far more fixable finding than being told to talk less.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">What is the difference between teacher talking time and teacher talk?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Teacher talking time is a quantity, measured in minutes or as a percentage of the lesson. Teacher talk is the language itself and its quality, including how instructions are worded, how questions are framed and how feedback is given. Cullen&#8217;s argument in 1998 was that the second matters more than the first, and that a good lesson is not identified by a stopwatch.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">How do I increase student talking time?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Change the interaction pattern rather than trying to speak less. Pair and group work with the teacher monitoring raises learner output immediately, because several learners speak at once instead of one at a time. Demonstrating an instruction rather than explaining it, eliciting rather than presenting, and waiting several seconds after a question all help.</p>
<h3 style="font-size: 19px; color: #0f2233; margin: 24px 0 8px;">Does teacher talking time work differently in online lessons?</h3>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0;">Yes, and mostly against the teacher. Overlapping speech is harder to manage on a video call, so learners wait for a gap and the teacher fills it. In a one to one online lesson the split is naturally closer to even than in a class of fifteen, so the figure to watch is not the ratio but whether the learner is producing extended turns or only answering questions.</p>
<h2 style="font-size: 24px; color: #0f2233; margin: 34px 0 10px;">Related entries</h2>
<p style="line-height: 1.7; margin: 0 0 22px;">Next in the glossary: <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/presentation-practice-production/">presentation, practice, production</a>, whose first stage is where teacher talk most reliably expands, and the <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/affective-filter/">affective filter</a>, which explains why a silent class is not always a class with nothing to say. The full <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/">TEFL teaching methods and classroom techniques glossary</a> holds every entry. For the qualifications and career terminology that sits alongside the teaching vocabulary, see the Institute&#8217;s <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teflinstitute.com/tefl-qualifications-explained/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">TEFL qualifications and terminology explained</a>, and for where this sits inside a wider method, its guide to <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://teflinstitute.com/blog/what-is-the-communicative-approach-in-esl-teaching/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">the communicative approach in ESL teaching</a>. Teachers working online will find the balance shifts again, which <a style="color: #0f6b7d;" href="https://tefl.ie/how-to-start-teaching-english-online/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">the Irish institute&#8217;s guide to starting out online</a> lists among the first habits to correct.</p>
<div style="border: 1px dashed #d5dbdf; border-radius: 10px; padding: 18px 20px; margin: 0 0 20px; background: #fafcfc;">
<p style="margin: 0 0 6px; font-weight: bold; color: #0f2233; font-size: 15px;">How to cite this definition</p>
<p style="margin: 0; font-size: 14px; line-height: 1.7; color: #4a5b66;">tefl.ai (2026) &#8216;Teacher talking time vs student talking time&#8217;, <em>TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques: A Teacher&#8217;s Glossary</em>. Available at: https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/ (Accessed: 18 September 2026).</p>
</div>
<p style="font-size: 14px; color: #4a5b66; margin: 0;"><strong>Last updated:</strong> 18 September 2026 · <strong>Written by:</strong> Tara Bourke, tefl.ai · <strong>Review cycle:</strong> definitions are re-checked against their cited sources every six months.</p>
<p><script type="application/ld+json">{
 "@context": "https://schema.org",
 "@graph": [
  {
   "@type": "DefinedTerm",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/#definition",
   "name": "Teacher talking time",
   "alternateName": [
    "TTT",
    "STT",
    "Student talking time",
    "Teacher talk time",
    "Teacher talking time vs student talking time"
   ],
   "description": "Teacher talking time is the proportion of a lesson the teacher spends speaking; student talking time is the proportion the learners do. The pair is used to describe the balance of a lesson rather than to set a target, and the useful question is what the teacher's talk is doing, not simply how much of it there is.",
   "url": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/",
   "sameAs": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#teacher-talking-time",
   "inDefinedTermSet": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"
   }
  },
  {
   "@type": "Article",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/#article",
   "headline": "Teacher Talking Time vs Student Talking Time",
   "description": "What teacher talking time and student talking time mean, what the ratio does and does not tell you, a worked example coding one recorded lesson, and why quality of teacher talk matters more than quantity.",
   "inLanguage": "en-GB",
   "datePublished": "2026-09-18",
   "dateModified": "2026-09-18",
   "mainEntityOfPage": {
    "@type": "WebPage",
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/"
   },
   "isPartOf": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/#glossary"
   },
   "about": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/#definition"
   },
   "author": {
    "@type": "Person",
    "name": "Tara Bourke"
   },
   "publisher": {
    "@id": "https://tefl.ai/#organization"
   },
   "citation": [
    "Chaudron, C. (1988) Second Language Classrooms: Research on Teaching and Learning. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.",
    "Sinclair, J. and Coulthard, M. (1975) Towards an Analysis of Discourse. London: Oxford University Press.",
    "Swain, M. (1985) 'Communicative Competence: Some Roles of Comprehensible Input and Comprehensible Output in its Development', in Gass, S. and Madden, C. (eds.) Input in Second Language Acquisition. Rowley: Newbury House.",
    "Thornbury, S. (1996) 'Teachers research teacher talk', ELT Journal 50(4), pp. 279 to 289.",
    "Cullen, R. (1998) 'Teacher talk and the classroom context', ELT Journal 52(3), pp. 179 to 187.",
    "Walsh, S. (2002) 'Construction or obstruction: teacher talk and learner involvement in the EFL classroom', Language Teaching Research 6(1), pp. 3 to 23.",
    "Walsh, S. (2006) Investigating Classroom Discourse. London: Routledge.",
    "Darn, S. 'Pros and cons of teacher talking time', British Council TeachingEnglish."
   ]
  },
  {
   "@type": "FAQPage",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/#faq",
   "mainEntity": [
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "What is a good ratio of teacher talking time to student talking time?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "There is no figure that holds across every lesson, and the ones in circulation, usually 30 per cent teacher and 70 per cent learner, are training heuristics rather than research findings. A beginners class needs more modelling than an advanced discussion class. The ratio is useful as a prompt to look at a lesson, and misleading as a standard to be marked against."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "Is teacher talking time always a bad thing?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "No. The British Council lists personalised presentations, questioning, natural conversation and storytelling as forms of teacher talk that earn their place, and in a monolingual classroom abroad the teacher may be the only source of natural English a learner hears. What displaces learning is unplanned talk: echoing answers, repeating instructions and filling silence."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "How do I measure my own teacher talking time?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Record one lesson on a phone and listen back with a timer, marking each stretch of teacher talk as instruction, model, feedback or filler. The category matters more than the total. Most teachers find the overall figure is defensible and the proportion of filler is not, which is a far more fixable finding than being told to talk less."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",    "name": "What is the difference between teacher talking time and teacher talk?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Teacher talking time is a quantity, measured in minutes or as a percentage of the lesson. Teacher talk is the language itself and its quality, including how instructions are worded, how questions are framed and how feedback is given. Cullen's argument in 1998 was that the second matters more than the first, and that a good lesson is not identified by a stopwatch."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "How do I increase student talking time?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Change the interaction pattern rather than trying to speak less. Pair and group work with the teacher monitoring raises learner output immediately, because several learners speak at once instead of one at a time. Demonstrating an instruction rather than explaining it, eliciting rather than presenting, and waiting several seconds after a question all help."
     }
    },
    {
     "@type": "Question",
     "name": "Does teacher talking time work differently in online lessons?",
     "acceptedAnswer": {
      "@type": "Answer",
      "text": "Yes, and mostly against the teacher. Overlapping speech is harder to manage on a video call, so learners wait for a gap and the teacher fills it. In a one to one online lesson the split is naturally closer to even than in a class of fifteen, so the figure to watch is not the ratio but whether the learner is producing extended turns or only answering questions."
     }
    }
   ]
  },
  {
   "@type": "BreadcrumbList",
   "@id": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/#breadcrumb",
   "itemListElement": [
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 1,
     "name": "tefl.ai",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/"
    },
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 2,
     "name": "TEFL Teaching Methods and Classroom Techniques Glossary",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/tefl-teaching-methods-glossary/"
    },
    {
     "@type": "ListItem",
     "position": 3,
     "name": "Teacher talking time vs student talking time",
     "item": "https://tefl.ai/teacher-talking-time/"
    }
   ]
  }
 ]
}</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
